B-64483EN 01 120229 FANUC Connection Manual HW
B-64483EN 01 120229 FANUC Connection Manual HW
B-64483EN 01 120229 FANUC Connection Manual HW
B-64483EN/01
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export of Series 30i-B, Series 31i-B5 from Japan is subject to an
export license by the government of Japan. Other models in this manual may also be
subject to export controls.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to
a failure of the product, install a safety device.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by ® or ™ in the main body.
B-64483EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Described below are the safety precautions regarding the control units and those peripheral units
explained herein. The safety precautions must be observed in order to use these units safely.
Because exchanging, as well as performing daily maintenance operations on, the control units and those
peripheral units explained herein may incur diverse dangers, you cannot be involved in such work unless
you have been sufficiently trained for safety.
Some safety precautions may not apply to your control units or peripheral units explained herein because
the units have no corresponding function. If this is the case, skip reading those precautions.
As for safety precautions regarding machine tools, refer to the respective machine manuals provided by
the machine tool builders.
Before starting to operate machines for check purposes, be sure to read the manuals provided by the
machine tool builders and FANUC and sufficiently understand their descriptions.
Contents
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64483EN/01
s-2
B-64483EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
Failing to observe any caution stated below can lead to fire, breakdown, blowout,
and malfunction.
1 Do not attach the units directly to any flammable object or install the units near
any flammable object.
2 Do not allow any foreign matter (such as a screw, metal chip, or coolant) to get
in the units.
3 Handle the units and printed-circuit boards gently because they are precision
devices. Be careful not to drop them or give a high impact to them.
4 Lay signal wires away from power wires as stated in this manual.
5 When fastening each unit or wire, be sure to observe the screw tightening torque
specified for them. If screws are tightened too weakly or too strongly, it is likely
that the unit may drop, break, or malfunction, or the wire may be short-circuited.
Do not forget to tighten all necessary screw.
6 Do not block any cooling fan air inlet or outlet. For units having no cooling fan,
allow space for natural convection cooling above and below them.
7 Be careful not to make an incorrect wiring or connection. Be sure to attach wires
and cables to their respective corresponding terminals and connectors.
8 Confirm equipment’s electrical rating stated herein. Do not apply any unspecified
voltage to the equipment.
9 Do not confuse voltage polarity. Carefully confirm the arrangement of connector
pins.
10 When making a cable assembly, press-mount, crimp, or solder the wires, using
the tool specified by the cable manufacturer.
11 Use printed-circuit boards and peripheral units that match your control unit.
12 When mounting the units, pay attention to their mass.
13 When detaching a cable from a unit, hold the connector rather than the cable.
When attaching a cable, be sure to fit its connector to the connector pins
securely. For connectors having a lock mechanism, be sure to lock them
securely.
14 As for the shielding wires of the cables specified herein, securely ground them,
using, for example, cable clamps.
15 Always use wires whose length, diameter, heat resistance, and flex resistance
match their use.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64483EN/01
CAUTION
Install each control unit, display unit, MDI unit, and machine operator panel in
such a place that neither cutting chip nor coolant will spatter to them. Otherwise,
damage or malfunction may occur.
s-4
B-64483EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the cause of the blown
fuse.
So, do not replace fuses unless you have been well informed of maintenance
work and safety.
When opening the cabinet and replacing fuses, be careful not to touch any
high-voltage circuit (marked with and covered with an electric shock
prevention cover).
When the electric shock prevention cover has been removed, you will get an
electric shock if you touch any high-voltage circuit.
CAUTION
Handle the batteries gently. Do not drop them or give a strong impact to them.
NOTE
Each control unit uses batteries, because it must hold data, such as programs,
offset values, and parameters even when AC power for it is off.
Back up the data (programs, offset values, and parameters) regularly.
If the battery voltage becomes low, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on
the machine operator’s panel or screen.
Once the battery voltage alarm has been displayed, replace the batteries within
one week. Otherwise, the memory contents may be lost.
For the battery replacement procedure, see Section 4.4, “Batteries”. Recollect or
discard old batteries in the way your local autonomous community specifies.
s-5
B-64483EN/01 PREFACE
PREFACE
This manual describes the information, that is, electrical and structural specifications, needed in
connecting machine tools to the control and peripheral units stated below. The manual covers the range
shown on the total connection diagrams mentioned in Chapter 2. The manual briefly describes the units
that are used in common with the FANUC control units, such as FANUC I/O units, FANUC PANEL i,
and servo motors. It also gives supplementary information for use of these units with the control units.
For detailed specifications, refer to the manuals of these components.
For options not covered in this manual, also refer to the manuals of these components.
Applicable models
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 30i–B 30i–B Series 30i
FANUC Series 31i–B5 31i–B5
Series 31i
FANUC Series 31i–B 31i–B
FANUC Series 32i–B 32i–B Series 32i
p-1
PREFACE B-64483EN/01
p-2
B-64483EN/01 PREFACE
p-3
PREFACE B-64483EN/01
Training
• FANUC runs FANUC Training Center to train those who will be involved in the connection,
maintenance, and operation of FANUC products. It is recommended to attend the class so you will
be able to use the products effectively.
Visit the following web site for detailed descriptions of its curriculum.
http://www.fanuc.co.jp/
p-4
B-64483EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING MOUNTING, WIRING, AND
EXCHANGING............................................................................................ s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING DESIGNING ..................................... s-4
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE .... s-5
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 1
1.1 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES .............. 1
1.1.1 Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units .............................................1
1.1.2 Configurations of Stand-alone Type Control Units..................................................5
1.1.3 Configurations of Optional Boards ........................................................................10
1.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW............................................................................ 11
1.2.1 LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview .........................................................11
1.2.2 Stand-alone Type Control Unit Overview..............................................................12
7 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link ............ 120
7.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 120
7.2 CONNECTION........................................................................................... 121
7.2.1 Connection of I/O Link i or I/O Link by Electric Cable ......................................123
7.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link i or I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable ...............124
7.2.3 Connection When Multiple Channels of the I/O Link i and I/O Link Are Used..126
7.3 ASSIGNMENT FOR I/O UNITS ................................................................. 136
7.3.1 Assignment of Signals..........................................................................................136
7.3.2 Fixed Signals ........................................................................................................136
7.3.3 Status Alarm .........................................................................................................138
7.4 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR ............................................................... 139
7.4.1 Manual Pulse Generator Connection....................................................................139
7.4.2 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator ...........................................................140
7.4.3 Manual Pulse Generator Signal Specifications ....................................................140
7.5 POWER SUPPLY ...................................................................................... 141
8 UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link .. 142
8.1 GENERAL UNITS...................................................................................... 142
8.2 CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR CONNECTOR PANEL ................. 144
8.2.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................144
8.2.2 Connection Diagram.............................................................................................145
8.2.3 Module Specifications..........................................................................................146
8.2.4 Connection of the Basic Module, and Extension Modules A and B ....................147
8.2.4.1 Connector pin arrangement.............................................................................. 147
8.2.4.2 DI (Input Signal) Connection .......................................................................... 148
8.2.4.3 DO (Output Signal) Connection ...................................................................... 150
8.2.4.4 DI/DO Signal Specifications ........................................................................... 151
8.2.5 Connection of Extension Module C (2A Output Module) ...................................152
8.2.5.1 Connector pin arrangement.............................................................................. 152
8.2.5.2 2A Output Signal Connection.......................................................................... 153
8.2.5.3 2A output signal specifications........................................................................ 154
8.2.6 Connection of Extension Module D (Analog Input Module)...............................154
8.2.6.1 Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation .......................................................... 154
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64483EN/01
c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64483EN/01
APPENDIX
A OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS AND CONNECTORS ................... 345
B 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES ......................... 392
c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64483EN/01
c-8
B-64483EN/01 1.CONFIGURATION
1 CONFIGURATION
1.1 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT
NAMES
The Series 30i/31i/32i series control units can roughly be categorized either as an LCD-mounted type or
stand-alone type. The LCD-mounted type is one having both control and indicator sections in it. With the
stand-alone type, the control and indicator sections are separated from each other, each being configured
as an independent unit. Described below is the configuration of each type. This manual focuses on how to
attach the connectors shown in the configuration diagrams to each device.
Series 30i/31i/32i LCD-mounted type control units having the personal computer function with Windows® CE
Number of option Number of horizontal Number of vertical soft
Screen size Touch panel
slots soft keys keys
Without
Without 1
2
10.4"
Without
With 1
2
10+2 8+1
Without
Without 1
2
12.1”
Without
With 1
2
-1-
1.CONFIGURATION B-64483EN/01
CAUTION
The touch panel is a device designed to be operated by touching directly its
screen. Use a FANUC-supplied exclusive touch panel pen (A02B-0236-K111).
Touching the screen with a sharp point, such as a pen, may damage or break
the indicator surface. Touching the screen with your finger may adversely affect
operability and soil the screen. Be sure to keep away from such improper use.
NOTE
The indicators having a touch panel has a protection sheet attached to its front
surface. Explanations about how to replace the protection sheet, refer to the
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Maintenance Manual (B-64485EN).
Memory card
interface
USB port
(5.6)
Horizontal soft
keys
NOTE
1 This figure shows the 10.4” LCD-mounted control unit as viewed from the front.
The basic configuration of the other control unit models is the same, as viewed
from the front.
2 The 8.4” LCD-mounted control unit has no vertical soft key.
-2-
B-64483EN/01 1.CONFIGURATION
NOTE
3 The LCD (liquid-crystal display) has been fabricated using an extreme precision
technology. However, some of their pixels may fail to light or stay constantly
lighting because of their characteristics. Please be forewarned that these
phenomena are not faults.
LCD-mounted type control unit (8.4”LCD unit and 10.4”LCD unit A) (rear view)
Battery
Fan unit
(4.4)
FSSB interface
connectors
[COP10A-1] (left)
[COP10A-2] (right)
(6)
MDI connector
[CA55] (5.1)
Power supply
connector
[CPD16A]
(4.3)
Ethernet connector
I/O device interface (Embedded Ethernet)
connector (RS-232C) [CD38A] (5.5)
[JD36A/JD54] (5.3)
-3-
1.CONFIGURATION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 This figure shows an LCD-mounted control unit having no option slot as viewed
from the rear. For the rear view of the control units having the personal computer
function with Windows® CE, see Chapter 11, "Connection for Personal
Computer Function with Windows® CE".
2 The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of
the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are
connector numbers.
3 Connectors [COP10A-2], [TBL], [CD38A], and [CD38B] may not be provided,
depending on the specifications of the hardware.
LCD-mounted type control unit (10.4”LCD unit B and 15”LCD unit) (rear view)
Battery
Fan unit
(4.4)
FSSB interface
connectors
[COP10A-1] (left)
[COP10A-2] (right)
(6)
MDI connector
[CA55] (5.1)
Fuse
Power supply
connector
[CPD16A]
(4.3)
Soft key connectors
Ethernet connector
I/O device interface (Embedded Ethernet)
connector (RS-232C) [CD38S] (5.5)
[JD36A/JD54] (5.3)
-4-
B-64483EN/01 1.CONFIGURATION
NOTE
1 This figure shows an LCD-mounted control unit having no option slot as viewed
from the rear. For the rear view of the control units having the personal computer
function with Windows® CE, see Chapter 11, "Connection for Personal
Computer Function with Windows® CE".
2 The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of
the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are
connector numbers.
3 Connectors [COP10A-2], [CD38S], and [CD38B] may not be provided,
depending on the specifications of the hardware.
Series 30i/31i/32i display units having the personal computer function with Windows® CE
Screen size Touch panel Number of horizontal soft keys Number of vertical soft keys
Without
10.4"
With
Without
12.1” 10+2 8+1
With
Without
15"
With
CAUTION
The touch panel is a device designed to be operated by touching directly its
screen. Use a FANUC-supplied exclusive touch panel pen (A02B-0236-K111).
Touching the screen with a sharp point, such as a pen, may damage or break
the indicator surface. Touching the screen with your finger may adversely affect
operability and soil the screen. Be sure to keep away from such improper use.
-5-
1.CONFIGURATION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
The indicators having a touch panel has a protection sheet attached to its front
surface. Explanations about how to replace the protection sheet, refer to the
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Maintenance Manual (B-64485EN).
Ethernet connector
(Embedded Ethernet)
[CD38A] (5.5)
24-VDC power supply
Optional slot 3 connector
[CPD19A] (right)
[CPD19B] (left)
(4.3)
FSSB interface
connectors
[COP10A-1] (lower)
[COP10A-2] (upper)
(7)
Optional slot 4
Optional slot 2
4-slot rack
NOTE
The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of
the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are
connector numbers.
-6-
B-64483EN/01 1.CONFIGURATION
Display unit for the stand-alone type control unit (10.4”LCD unit A)
Memory card
interface
Front view
USB port
(5.6)
Horizontal soft
keys
Rear view
MDI interconnection
connector [JA73]
(5.2)
MDI connector
[CA55] (5.2)
Soft key
connectors
Fuse
Video signal Power supply
interconnection connector connectors
[CP1A]
[CA103] (5.2) [CP1B] (5.2)
NOTE
1 The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of
the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are
connector numbers.
2 Connectors [JA73] and [CA103], the memory card interface, and USB ports may
3 See Chapter 11 for explanations about the display unit for the control unit having
the personal computer function with Windows® CE.
4 The LCD (liquid-crystal display) has been fabricated using an extreme precision
technology. However, some of their pixels may fail to light or stay constantly
lighting because of their characteristics. Please be forewarned that these
phenomena are not faults.
-7-
1.CONFIGURATION B-64483EN/01
Display unit for the stand-alone type control unit (15”LCD unit and 10.4”LCD unit B)
Vertical soft
keys
Liquid-crystal
display
USB port
(5.6)
Horizontal soft
keys
MDI connector
[CA55] (5.2)
Rear
Power supply
connectors
[CPD18] (5.2)
NOTE
1 The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of
the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are
connector numbers.
2 For the display units for the control units having the personal computer function
with Windows® CE, see Chapter 11, "Connection for Personal Computer
Function with Windows® CE".
3 The LCD (liquid-crystal display) has been fabricated using an extreme precision
technology. However, some of their pixels may fail to light or stay constantly
lighting because of their characteristics. Please be forewarned that these
phenomena are not faults.
-8-
B-64483EN/01 1.CONFIGURATION
Display unit for automotive for the stand-alone type control unit
Vertical soft
keys
Liquid-crystal
display
MDI
USB port
(5.2)
Function key
switches Optical connector for
display control
[COP21M] (5.2)
Power supply
connector
[CPD18] (5.2)
Rear
NOTE
1 The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of
the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are
connector numbers.
2 The I/O Link i and I/O Link interfaces are optional.
3 The LCD (liquid-crystal display) has been fabricated using an extreme precision
technology. However, some of their pixels may fail to light or stay constantly
lighting because of their characteristics. Please be forewarned that these
phenomena are not faults.
-9-
1.CONFIGURATION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of
the descriptions in this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are
connector numbers.
The Fast Ethernet board may be used also as data server or FL-net functions,
depending on the settings of parameters.
- 10 -
B-64483EN/01 1.CONFIGURATION
Main board
- CPU for controlling CNC
- Power supply
- Axis control function
- MDI I/F
- I/O Link i, I/O Link control
function
- PMC control function
- High-speed skip (HDI)
- RS-232C I/F
- Memory card I/F
Fast Ethernet board - USB I/F
- Ethernet function
Fast Ethernet function note2
- DeviceNet function
Data server function - PC functions (Windows® CE
FL-net function compatible PC functions)
Note
1 On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be mounted.
2 DeviceNet master functions are provided on the mainboard or on the optional board,
depending on the specification.
- 11 -
1.CONFIGURATION B-64483EN/01
Main board
Slot 3 Slot 1
Slot 4 Slot 2
Options (Slot 1 to 4)
- 12 -
B-64483EN/01 2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
- 13 -
2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B-64483EN/01
Control unit
24V-IN(CPD19A) 24 VDC power supply
24V-OUT(CPD19B) To I/O device
Display unit
COP21A,B,M
DISPLAY(COP21A) { MDI unit
24VDC CP1A CA55 CK27
CP1B Memory card
(Touch panel)
PANEL i or personal computer
JD1B βamplifier
with I/O Link Servo motor
JD1A
Circuit breaker
24VDC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
αi PS
Position coder
FSSB(COP10A-1) αi SP
COP10B
αi SV Servo motor
COP10A
ETHERNET(CD38A) Ethernet
- 14 -
B-64483EN/01 2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
HSSB(COP21A) PANEL i
or Personal Computer
PROFIBUS-DP
master board
PROFIBUS-DP
slave board
DeviceNet
master board
DeviceNet
slave board
CC-Link remote
device station board
- 15 -
2.TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B-64483EN/01
Additional axis
board
Optional slot
Circuit breaker
24VDC
AC reactor
200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
αi PS
Position coder
αi SP
FSSB(COP10A-3)
Servo motor
COP10B αi SV
COP10A
Servo motor
COP10B αi SV
COP10A
Servo motor
COP10B αi SV
COP10A
- 16 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE
CABINET
- 17 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 If the control unit is installed 1000 m or higher above sea level, the allowable
upper ambient temperature of the control unit in the cabinet is changed as
follows. Assume that the allowable upper ambient temperature of the control unit
in the cabinet installed 1000 m or higher above sea level decreases by 1.0°C for
every 100 m rise in altitude.
Example)
When a control unit whose required operating ambient temperature range is
0°C to 55°C is installed 1750 m above sea level:
55°C-(1750m-1000m)/100m × 1.0°C = 47.5°C
Therefore, the allowable ambient temperature range is from 0°C to 47.5°C.
2 When using a unit having additional installation conditions, be sure to meet also
these conditions.
CAUTION
1 The cabinet must be fully closed. The cabinet must be designed to prevent the
entry of airborne dust, coolant, and organic solvent.
2 The cabinet must be designed so that the permissible temperature of each unit
is not exceeded. (See Section 3.3.)
- 18 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
CAUTION
3 A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air within. (This is
not necessary for a unit with fan.) The fan must be adjusted so that the air
moves at 0.5 m/sec along the surface of each installed unit.
However, do not blow air from the fan directly to the unit, because doing so can
readily make dust attach the portion where the air flow hits, leading to possible
trouble. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.)
4 For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between each unit
and the wall of the cabinet.
5 Each FANUC-supplied unit, such as a display or operator’s panel, has been
designed on the assumption that they will be mounted using packing and with
the specified screw tightening torque. Failing to mount them as specified can
lead to unit damage and/or malfunction. Be sure to use packing and observe the
specified screw tightening torque. (See Sections 3.6 and 3.7.)
6 Failing to use packing or to provide complete sealing, or using any packing not
resistant to coolant in use will allow dust, coolant, and organic solvent to get in
the cabinet, leading to possible equipment trouble. Be sure to use an appropriate
packing and a secure sealing.
In addition, use an appropriate packing and a secure sealing for the cable outlets
and doors of the machine builder-provided units, such as displays, operator’s
panels, and cabinet pendant boxes. (See Section 3.7.)
7 The LCD must not be installed in such a place that coolant would directly fall
onto the unit. Be sure to attach a protection cover to the LCD if it will be used in
an environment where it is anticipated that coolant may come into contact with it,
for example, an environment with a relatively dense oil mist.
8 Noise must be minimized. As the machine and the control unit are reduced in
size, the parts that generate noise may be placed near noise-sensitive parts in
the magnetics cabinet.
The control unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design to
minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted to the control
unit is necessary. (See Section 3.4.)
9 When placing units in the cabinet, also consider ease of maintenance. The units
should be placed so that they can be checked and replaced easily when
maintenance is performed.
10 The hard disk drive and floppy disk drive must not be installed near the source of
a strong magnetic field.
11 The installation conditions of the I/O unit and connector panel I/O module must
be satisfied. In order to secure ventilation in the equipment, mount the I/O unit
and connector panel I/O module in the specified orientation. Clearances of 100
mm or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit and
connector panel I/O module.
Top I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall extend from the
bottom of this unit.)
Bottom
- 19 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
- 20 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
NOTE
1 The values listed above do not include any heat output of the CPU card, servo
card, DeviceNet card, or option boards. To obtain the total heat output of the
control unit, add the heat output from the CPU card, servo card, DeviceNet card,
and any option boards.
2 See Chapter 6 for the heat output of the separate detector interface unit.
3 See Chapter 8 for the heat output of each I/O unit.
4 See Chapter 11 for the heat output of the control units having the personal
computer function with Windows® CE.
5 Refer to the PANEL i Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN) for the
heat output of the PANEL i.
An example of the thermal design for the cabinet shown in Fig. 3.3.3 is shown below.
- 21 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
Fig. 3.3.3
In this case, the allowable total heat dissipation for the cabinet is:
8 × 0.5722 × 13 + 3.7 × 0.2632 × 13 = 72 W.
In consequence, it can be concluded that the units shown in Table 3.3.3 on the next page can be installed
in this cabinet.
Table 3.3.3
LCD-mounted type control unit (with 10.4”LCD unit A) 18W
Additional heat output from a control unit having communication features +3W
CPU card (high-speed version) 11W
Servo card (A26) 6W
Optional board (Additional axis board) 5W
Standard machine operator's panel 15W(Note)
120-mm square fan motor for air mixing 8W
Total heat dissipation of the above 66W
- 22 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
NOTE
The 15 W quoted for the standard machine operator's panel represents an
example heat output value when half of all the input signals are turned on. This
value varies, depending on the mechanical configuration.
- 23 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Impedance includes a resistance component that converts electric current to
heat as well as a component called “reactance”, and indicates a characteristic of
resistance to the flow of alternating current at a certain frequency.
α i PS α i SP α i SV
Ground bar for
shield clamp Control unit
JF*
Connection at
low impedance Machine
Connect the unit operator’s panel
to a metal plate
close to it.
However, keep
signal grounding
points at least 24 V output power
10 cm away
from power wire
AC input
Signal line
grounding Machine side
points.
Power line
Motor
When the multipoint grounding scheme is adopted, the units can be grounded at low impedance, and
ground wires (wires from the unit’s ground terminal to a grounding plate) can be shortened, so that wiring
may be simplified.
- 24 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
CAUTION
If it is impossible to configure cabinet metal plates with a low impedance, it is
likely that noise may effect grounding circuits shared by power wires and signal
wires.
α i PS α i SP α i SV
Ground bar for Control unit
shield clamp
JF*
Machine
operator’s panel
AC input
Achieve grounding
separation between
the signal system
and power system.
Machine side
Signal line
Grounding electrode or
Frame grounding
main grounding terminal
System grounding (PE)
3.4.1.2 Cabinet
A cabinet is an important element in improving noise immunity and suppressing radiated noise. One of
the causes of problems related to noise immunity and radiated noise is faulty electrical continuity between
the metal plates that make up the cabinet. Typically, noise that becomes a problem is high–frequency
noise, against which measures must be taken in the cabinet design.
- 25 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
Bead welding Bring the metal plates into direct contact with each
other, without applying a coating to their joint areas.
NOTE
Explained above is how to provide cabinets with low-impedance electrical
continuity so as to increase noise immunity and to suppress noise radiation. See
Subsection 3.4.2 for conditions required to configure protective grounding
circuits.
- 26 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
<Good example>
Cabinet
Coating
Metal
mask
plate
Coating Unit
Screw
Metal plate
Cabinet
<Bad example>
Cabinet
Metal
plate
Unit
- 27 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
- 28 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
Machine
Grounding electrode
Fig. 3.4.3 (a) Continuity between the control unit’s ground and 0 V terminals
- 29 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
Protective
ground terminal
(M4 stud)
Electric wire
2
(2 mm or thicker)
Protective ground
tap on cabinet’s
metal plate
Signal system ground bar
Multiple-point grounding
Single-point grounding
- 30 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
Front Side
4-slot rack
2-slot rack
Electric wire
2
(2 mm or thicker)
Multiple-point grounding:
Connect the 0 V line to a nearby
metal plate connected electrically
to a grounding electrode.
Single-point grounding:
Frame ground Connect the 0 V line to the signal
ground bar connected electrically to a
grounding electrode.
Frame ground
- 31 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 Binding the cables in one group separately from another means that the groups
are placed 10 cm or more apart from one another.
2 Covering a group with an electromagnetic shield means that shielding is
provided between groups with grounded steel plates.
3 The shield is not required when the cable for the MDI is no more than 50 cm in
length.
- 32 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
C a bine t P e nda nt b ox
T o m otor S hielding
pla te
an d th e like
S ection of duc t
G roup A G rou p B , C
S hielding pla te
- 33 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
CR snubber
Motor
• Place the diode close to the inductive load in order to minimize its wiring.
+
Inductive load (such as a relay)
Diode
図3.4.5 (b) Example of applying a diode
Cable
Metal fittings
for clamp
40 mm to 80 mm
NOTE
1 Select a cable with a proper length.
2 If the cable is too long, the noise immunity may be reduced or noise may be
caused on other cables. In addition, when the excess length is coiled, the
inductance is increased and a high voltage is induced during turning on or off of
signals. This may cause a failure or a malfunction due to noise.
3 Bundle and clamp the shields of cables that lead into the control unit or amplifier
at a point, respectively, close to the unit or amplifier.
Control unit
Cabinet
Shield
- 35 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
Ground terminal
(grounded)
Fig. 3.4.6 (c) Ground bar for shield clamp (outline drawing)
The ground bar for cable clamping must be made of a steel plate at least 2 mm thick and plated with
nickel.
Ground bar for shield clamp
8
12
20 (Unit: mm)
Fig. 3.4.6 (d) Ground bar for shield clamp (hole arrangement and dimension drawing)
Max. 55
Reference)
28
17
(Unit: mm)
- 36 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
Installation procedure
The surge-absorbing elements used for measures against surges due to lightening must be installed in the
input power unit as shown in the figure below. The figure below shows an example in which an
insulating transformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an insulating transformer is installed,
surge-absorbing element 2 (between line and ground) is not required.
To control power input for control unit
Circuit
24 VDC power and control power
breaker
supply input of Power Supply for
(MCCB)
servo amplifier
R To main circuit
AC Circuit Insulating Circuit Magnetic AC
input S power input of
breaker transformer breaker contactor reactor
Power Supply for
T
(MCCB) (MCCB) servo amplifier
PE
Circuit
breaker
a
(5A,MCCB)
b
Surge-absorbing element 1
(between lines)
Surge-absorbing element 2
(between line and ground)
Fig. 3.4.7 Example of installing lightning surge absorbers on 200 VAC lines
CAUTION
1 For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy line must be as
short as possible.
Wire size : Cross-sectional area at least 2 mm2 large
Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for the connection of
surge-absorbing element 1 and that (b) of surge-absorbing element
2 must be 2 m or less.
2 If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages (1000 VAC and
1500 VAC) to the power line, remove surge-absorbing element 2. Otherwise, the
overvoltages would activate the element.
- 37 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
CAUTION
3 The circuit breaker (5A) is a short circuit protection of lines if the surge-absorbing
elements result in short circuit breakdown due to the absorption of an excessive
amount of energy.
NOTE
The circuit breaker (5A) can be used also for other electric parts on the machine
because no current flows through surge-absorbing elements 1 and 2 in the
normal state. The “other electric parts on the machine” can be the control power
supply of Power Supply for servo unit and the power supply for the fan motor for
a spindle motor.
A A A
50mm
Rear view
50mm
B B B
Fig. 3.5.1
- 38 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
Space for air flow, and access area for fan unit replacement
50 A A
380 C
Spare connector
50 B B
80
Fig. 3.5.2
- 39 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
The following table lists the tightening torque for screws and nuts used to fasten those units having
molded mounting parts, such as stand-alone control units and separate detector interface units.
Screw and nut diameter Tightening torque
M4 1.1 to 1.5 N⋅m
M5 2.4 to 2.8 N⋅m
CAUTION
Be sure to observe the rules listed above when tightening screws. If screws are
tightened too weakly or too strongly, it is likely that the unit may drop, break, or
malfunction.
For units having a touch panel in particular, be sure to observe the above rules.
Failing to observe them can cause the touch panel to malfunction.
NOTE
For units having different installation conditions specified herein, observe them
first.
- 40 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
WARNING
Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level, oil-free coolants
called synthetic, and water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level, in particular,
can largely affect the CNC and peripheral units. Please note that, even if
consideration is taken to protect them from direct exposure to these coolants,
the following trouble is likely to occur.
- Coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a high activation level
Some coolants containing sulfur or chlorine are at an extremely high activity
level. If such a coolant adheres to the CNC or peripheral units, it reacts
chemically with a material, such as resin, of equipment, possibly leading to
corrosion or deterioration. If it gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it corrodes
metals, such as copper and silver, used as component materials, possibly
leading to a defective component.
- Synthetic-type coolants having a high permeability
Some synthetic-type coolants whose lubricating component is, for example,
PAG (polyalkylene glycol) have an extremely high permeability. If such a
coolant is used even in equipment having a high closeness, it can readily flow
into the equipment through, for example, gaskets, or packing. It is likely that,
if the coolant gets in the CNC or a peripheral unit, it may deteriorate the
insulation and damage the components.
- Water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level
Some coolants whose pH is increased using alkanolamine are so strong
alkali that its standard dilution will lead to pH10 or higher. If such a coolant
spatters over the surface of the CNC or peripheral unit, it reacts chemically
with a material, such as resin, possibly leading to corrosion or deterioration.
- 41 -
3.INSTALLATION B-64483EN/01
When making screw holes in packing, be careful not to cut to the edge of the packing. Any extra cut can let
coolant get in the cabinet through the screw hole, causing trouble.
Packing
Screw hole
*) When making screw holes in packing, be careful not to cut to the edge of the packing.
Packing for LCD units, MDI units, and standard machine operator’s panels
Observe the following rough standards for the thickness and hardness of packing used with LCD units
(included LCD-mounted control units or display units), MDI units, and standard machine operator’s
panels.
The following models of packing can be purchased from FANUC. These models are electrically
conductive. When they are used to mount a unit on a cabinet or pendant box, they leave no electrical gap
between the unit and cabinet or pendant box, being effective in electromagnetic wave shielding and EMC
measures.
Ordering information Use
A02B-0323-K302 For 8.4” LCD unit, for standard MDI unit (ONG 8.4” LCD unit)
A02B-0323-K301 For 10.4” LCD unit, for standard MDI unit (ONG vertical type)
A02B-0323-K300 For 12.1” LCD unit
A02B-0323-K304 For 15” LCD unit
A02B-0323-K306 For display unit for automotive
A02B-0323-K310 For standard MDI unit (ONG vertical type)
A02B-0323-K313 For small MDI unit (ONG 8.4” LCD unit)
A02B-0323-K314 For standard MDI unit (QWERTY)
A02B-0323-K315 For standard MDI unit (QWERTY type B)
A02B-0323-K320 For main panel of standard machine operator’s panel
CAUTION
1 We have evaluated the above models of packing for many different coolants.
However, we do not necessarily guarantee that they are resistant to all coolants.
They are not resistant to, for example, coolants containing sulfur or chlorine at a
high activation level and water-soluble coolants at a high alkali level.
2 When attaching these models of packing, observe the cautions provided
together with them.
When using packing to install a LCD unit, MDI unit, or standard machine operator’s panel in a cabinet or
pendant box, be careful not to pinch the packing between the mounting surface of the cabinet or pendant box
and the brim of the unit being installed.
- 42 -
B-64483EN/01 3.INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Do not install the LCD-mounted control unit and the display unit in such a place
that coolant would directly fall onto the unit. Be sure to attach a protection cover
to the LCD-mounted control unit and the display unit if they will be used in an
environment where it is anticipated that coolant may scatter over them, for
example, an environment with a relatively dense oil mist.
Dent
CAUTION
When attaching screw caps, pay due attention to the dent in them and be careful
not leave any gap. Otherwise, coolant may get in the equipment, causing
trouble.
- 43 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-64483EN/01
24 VDC
input for 24VDC
control input
ON/OFF
24VDC power
circuit
supply
- 44 -
B-64483EN/01 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
CAUTION
When the ON/OFF circuit is provided on the DC side of a 24 VDC power supply,
on-time rush current imposes an extremely heavy burden on the relay contact in
the ON/OFF circuit compared with the time when the ON/OFF circuit is provided
on the AC side. So, it is necessary to select a relay that is highly resistant to rush
current. In general, a relay having a high current rating and being large in size
should be selected.
In the connection shown in Fig. 4.1.1(b), for example, use a separate 24 VDC
power supply if voltage variation due to abrupt changes in the load or rush
current may transiently exceed the rated input voltage range (24 VDC ±10%) for
the control unit or peripheral unit.
As for a control unit having the personal computer function with Windows® XP, it
is likely that input AC shut-down, such as power failure or dip, may corrupt the
contents of the hard disk or CF card. So, read the PANELi Connection and
Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN) carefully and understand its contents
sufficiently.
Example 1
Control unit or
AC input 24VDC power supply peripheral unit
Unit with
high load
fluctuation
Example 2
Control unit or
AC input 24VDC power supply peripheral unit
Fig. 4.1.1 (b) Example of connection with high transient voltage variation
- 45 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Try as much as possible to avoid the configuration shown in Fig. 4.1.1(b) even
when load fluctuation and rush current are low.
In a configuration where two or more units are connected to the same 24 VDC
power supply, the control unit will not be able to start, thus failing to issue an
alarm, if the power supply fails to operate because of a fault in a unit other than
the control unit. For this reason, it is likely that it may take time to locate the fault.
If the 24 VDC power supply for the control unit and peripheral units must be
connected also to another unit because of a limited space in the power
magnetics cabinet, insert a noise filter before the 24 VDC input for the control
unit and peripheral units in order to prevent noise from the 24 VDC power supply
from entering the control unit and peripheral units after paying due consideration
to the voltage variation resulting from load fluctuation or rush current.
(Recommended noise filter: ZGB2203-01U manufactured by TDK)
- 46 -
B-64483EN/01 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
26.4V
Output
voltage
21.6V
Output
current
0A
Noise
21.6V
CAUTION
Do not use any power supply circuit, consisting of a capacitor and rectifier circuit,
like one shown in Fig. 4.1.2 (b), because it cannot maintain a voltage of 24 VDC
(the voltage falls to 21.6 V or below in each 24 VDC input for the control unit and
peripheral units) due to instantaneous interruption or voltage variation in the AC
input. Instead, use a voltage regulator.
Rectifier
AC input circuit Control unit
(*) and other units
(*) The rectifier circuit here refers to a diode-based full-wave rectifier circuit or the like.
Fig. 4.1.2 (b) Example of a power supply circuit that cannot maintain 24 VDC
- 47 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 Each power capacity listed above does not include that of option boards or the
DeviceNet card.
2 When connecting the RS-232C device which will draw power from the control
unit, add the power capacity that the device requires to the listed power capacity.
3 Limit the total power consumption of memory cards and USB memories to within
2 W.
4 See Chapter 6 for the power capacity of the separate detector interface unit.
5 See Chapter 8 for the power capacity of I/O units.
6 See Chapter 11 for the power capacity of the control units having the personal
computer function with Windows® CE.
7 Refer to the PANEL i Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN) for the
power capacity of the PANEL i.
8 Selecting 24 VDC power supplies impose restrictions besides their power
capacity. Be sure to read also Subsection 4.1.2.
- 48 -
B-64483EN/01 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
WARNING
If the machine tool of interest has a vertical axis, it is necessary to select a 24
VDC power supply that can hold its output of 24 VDC for a prolonged time even
after the AC input has been interrupted (including power failure and
instantaneous power interruption) in order to keep a possible fall along the
vertical axis within an acceptable range. The control unit deenergizes servo
circuits if its 24 VDC input falls to 21.6 V or below. For this reason, failing to
maintain the 24 VDC input to the control unit for a satisfactory period after the
AC input has been interrupted may lead to a larger amount of fall along the
vertical axis, depending on a peripheral circuit in use, because the servo for the
vertical axis is deenergized before the peripheral circuit detects an AC input
interruption and activates the brake. In general, selecting a 24 VDC power
supply having a power capacity with a wide margin would prolong the hold time
of the 24 VDC output after an AC input interruption.
- 49 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-64483EN/01
The expression “the same time” here means that the power to the units mentioned in Steps 1 and 2 above
has been turned on at least within 500 ms after the 24 VDC power supply for the control unit mentioned
in Step 3 above has been turned on. The power to each unit mentioned in Step 3 must have been turned on
within a period between 200 ms before the 24 VDC power supply for the control unit is turned on and
500 ms after that time.
ON
Power to the overall machine
Servo amplifier control power
supply OFF
t1
ON
Power to the control unit
OFF
t2 t3
t1:-500ms It is meant that the power to the overall machine and the servo amplifier control
power are turned on at least within 500 ms after the control unit power has been
turned on.
t2: 200ms It is meant that the power to peripheral units (including Power Mate i) is turned on
not earlier than 200 ms before the control unit power is turned on.
t3:-500ms It is meant that the power to peripheral units (including Power Mate i) is turned on
not earlier than 500 ms before the control unit power is turned on.
NOTE
Leave each of the memory backup battery (3 VDC) and separate absolute pulse
coder battery (6 VDC) connected regardless of whether the control unit power is
on or off. Removing these batteries with the control unit power turned off can
corrupt parameters and programs in the control unit as well as position data in
the pulse coder.
See Subsection 4.4.1 for explanations about how to replace the memory backup
battery.
See Subsection 4.4.2 for explanations about how to replace the separate
absolute pulse coder battery.
- 50 -
B-64483EN/01 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
4 Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link or I/O Link i, the separate detector interface unit, and
the display unit for stand-alone type control unit (24 VDC), power to the control unit (24 VDC)
5 Servo amplifier control power supply (24 VDC), power to the separate detector (scale)
6 Power to the overall machine (AC input)
The expression “the same time” here means that there is no problem even if the power to the units
mentioned in Steps 5 and 6 above is turned off not earlier than 500 ms before the power to the control
unit mentioned in Step 4 above is turned off. If the power to the units mentioned in Steps 5 and 6 is
turned off earlier, alarm information is left in the control unit. In addition, the power to each peripheral
unit mentioned in Step 4 above must be turned off not earlier than 500 ms before the power to the control
unit is turned off. Otherwise, alarm information is left in the control unit.
ON
Power to peripheral units
(including Power Mate i)
OFF
t4
ON
Power to the control unit
OFF
t4
Fig. 4.2.2
t4:500ms It is meant that the power of interest is turned off not earlier than 500 ms before the
power to the control unit is turned off.
CAUTION
The power to the control unit cannot be turned on or off with peripheral units
supplied with power.
Before turning off the power to the control unit, be sure to turn off the power to
the units (such as slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link i or I/O Link, the I/O
Link i, I/O Link-equipped βi series servo amplifier, Power Mate i, separate
detector I/F units, display units for stand-alone type control unit, servo amplifier
control power, and separate detectors (scale)) connected to the control unit.
- 51 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-64483EN/01
WARNING
It is impossible for the control side to control motors if the power supply is off or
there is no AC input (including power failure). It is necessary for the machine
side to perform any necessary processing.
If the control unit is used to control a vertical axis, for example, provide the motor
with a brake mechanism to prevent a fall along the vertical axis. The brake
should be controlled in such a way that the motor is clamped when the servo has
not be started or when the motor is not supposed to rotate and unclamped only
when it is supposed to rotate. It is common practice to clamp servo motors when
the servo axes cannot be controlled because of the power supply being off or of
a power failure. Even with this common practice, a fall may occur along a
controlled axis before the relay works. So, it is necessary to examine whether
the fall distance poses any problem.
Power-off: Before turning off the control unit power, be sure to apply the
brake to clamp the motor.
Power failure: On detecting a power failure, apply the brake quickly.
Turning off the control unit power results in the servo being
deenergized. So, select a 24 VDC power supply that can maintain
its 24 VDC output for a prolonged time after an AC input
interruption.
- 52 -
B-64483EN/01 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
CPD16A or CPD19A
1 +24V
2 0V 24VDC stabilized power
3 24VDC ±10%
GND
Cable
CPD16A or CPD19A
Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (housing) Use terminals that match
24VDC power
1-175218-5 (contact) 24 VDC power. supply
In the stand-alone type control unit, a voltage of 24 VDC once input to CPD19A can be branched out
from CPD19B. The terminal arrangement of CPD19B is shown below. With this configuration, it is
necessary for the 24 VDC power supply to supply as much current to CPD19A as the total of that
required by the control unit and that required by external devices connected to CPD19B. The
current-carrying capacity of CPD19B is 1.0 A.
Control unit External device
CPD19B
1 +24V
2 0V
3
Cable
CPD19B
Tyco Electronics
Use terminals that
2-178288-3 (housing)
match external External
1-175218-5 (contact)
devices used. device
+24V (1)
0V (2)
4.4 BATTERIES
A system using this control unit uses batteries in the places listed below. Refer to the FANUC PANEL i
Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN) for explanations about the batteries used for the
PANEL i. Used batteries must be discarded according to appropriate local ordinances or rules. When
discarding batteries, insulate them by using tape and so forth to prevent the battery terminals from
short-circuiting.
- 53 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Before shipped from FANUC, the control unit is equipped with a lithium battery
set as default. With this lithium battery, memory contents can be preserved for
one year.
- 54 -
B-64483EN/01 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
(3) Insert a new lithium battery, prepared in advance, into the battery case (by pushing it in until the
claw of the lithium battery fits in the case). Make sure that the claw is latched securely.
WARNING
It is likely that the lithium battery may explode unless it is replaced correctly.
Do not use any battery other than the specified one (A02B-0323-K102).
CAUTION
Steps (1) to (3) should be completed within 30 minutes.
Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified
period. Otherwise, the contents of SRAM may be lost.
Before starting battery replacement, save the SRAM contents in a batch. They
can be restored easily even if they are lost.
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (B-64485EN) for explanations about how to
save and restore SRAM contents in a batch.
NOTE
Discard used batteries as “industrial waste” according to the rules and
ordinances of the country where the machine is installed and of the local
government that has jurisdiction over the location of the machine. When
discarding them, insulate the battery terminals with tape or the like to protect
them from short-circuiting.
- 55 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-64483EN/01
WARNING
It is likely that the lithium battery may explode unless it is replaced correctly.
Do not use any battery other than the specified one (A02B-0200-K102).
CAUTION
Steps (1) to (3) should be completed within 30 minutes.
Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified
period. Otherwise, the contents of SRAM may be lost.
Before starting battery replacement, save the SRAM contents in a batch. They
can be restored easily even if they are lost.
Refer to the Maintenance Manual (B-64485EN) for explanations about how to
save and restore SRAM contents in a batch.
NOTE
Discard used batteries as “industrial waste” according to the rules and
ordinances of the country where the machine is installed and of the local
government that has jurisdiction over the location of the machine. When
discarding them, insulate the battery terminals with tape or the like to protect
them from short-circuiting.
- 56 -
B-64483EN/01 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
Example of connecting the battery case to the control unit (LCD-mounted type)
NOTE
1 The battery cable is engaged with its connector using a simple lock mechanism.
Fasten the cable at a length of 500 mm or smaller measured from the connector
with some slack so that the connector will not be disengaged due to the weight
or tension of the cable.
2 Keep the battery cable away from any possible noise source, such as power
wires.
CAUTION
To replace the battery when the power is off, follow the same procedure as that
for the replacement of a lithium battery, described above.
Dry cell × 2
Cover
Connection
terminal on the rear Mounting hole
×4
Battery case
- 57 -
4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B-64483EN/01
NOTE
The above values indicate the estimated service life of batteries used with
FANUC absolute Pulsecoders. The actual battery service life depends on the
machine configuration based on, for example, detector types. For details,
contact the machine tool builder.
Replacing batteries
To prevent absolute position information in absolute Pulsecoders from being lost, turn on the machine
power before replacing the battery. The replacement procedure is described below.
<1> Ensure that the power to the servo amplifier is turned on.
<2> Ensure that the machine is in the emergency stop state (the motor is inactive).
<3> Ensure that the DC link charge LED of the servo amplifier is off.
<4> Detach the old batteries and attach new ones.
- 58 -
B-64483EN/01 4.POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
WARNING
• The absolute Pulsecoder of each of the αi/αi S series servo motors and the βi S
series servo motors (βi S0.4 to βi S22) has a built-in backup capacitor.
Therefore, even when the power to the servo amplifier is off and the batteries
are replaced, reference position return is not required if the replacement
completes within less than 10 minutes. Turn the power on and replace the
batteries if the replacement will take 10 minutes or more.
• To prevent electric shock, be careful not to touch metal parts in the power
magnetics cabinet when replacing the batteries.
• Because the servo amplifier uses a large-capacitance electrolytic capacitor
internally, the servo amplifier remains charged for a while even after the power is
turned off. Before touching the servo amplifier for maintenance or other
purposes, ensure your safety by measuring the residual voltage in the DC link
with a tester and confirming that the charge indication LED (red) is off.
• Be sure to replace the batteries with specified ones. Pay attention to the battery
polarity. If a wrong type of battery is used or a battery is installed with incorrect
polarity, the battery may overheat, blow out, or catch fire, or the absolute
position information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
• Ensure that the battery connector is inserted in the correct position.
Batteries
Four A06B-6050-K061 batteries or
D-size alkaline dry cells
CAUTION
• Four D-size alkaline dry cells (LR20) that are commercially available can be
used as batteries. A set of four A06B-6050-K061 batteries is optionally available
from FANUC.
• Replace all the four batteries with new ones. If old and new batteries are mixed,
the absolute position information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
• When connecting batteries, pay due attention to their polarity. If they are
connected in reverse polarity, it is likely that they may get hot, explode, or catch
fire. In addition, it is also likely that information on absolute positions may be lost
from the absolute Pulsecoder.
4.4.3 Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6VDC)
The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is installed in the servo amplifier.
Explanations about how to connect and replace the battery, refer to the maintenance manual for the servo
amplifier in use.
- 59 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
CA55
CK27
MDI cable
MDI unit
- 60 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
CK27
CK27
A02B-0236-K813(45cm)
A02B-0236-K814(1.5m)
NOTE
For MDI cable connector mating on the CA55 side, a simple lock mechanism is
employed. Ensure that a load greater than 1 kg is not applied to the connectors.
Moreover, clamp the cable so that excessive force is not applied due to
vibration. However, shielding and clamping are not required for a cable of up to
50 cm.
- 61 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
Edit keys
AUX key
CTRL key
ALT key
TAB key
Input key
Function keys
Shift key
Help key
Reset key
Edit keys
Cursor keys
- 62 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Edit keys
AUX key
CTRL key
ALT key
TAB key
Input key
Function keys
Shift key
Help key
Reset key
Edit keys
Cursor keys
- 63 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
Reset key
Address keys
Numeric keys
AUX key
CTRL key
Shift key
TAB key
Page change keys Cursor keys Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key
Reset key
Address keys
CTRL key
ALT key
TAB key
Input key
AUX key Shift key Cursor keys
Page change keys Cancel (CAN) key
- 64 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
5.2.1 Overview
This subsection describes connection between the stand-alone type control unit and display unit. It also
describes connection between the display unit and MDI unit.
CP1B
CA55
MDI unit
CK27
- 65 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
Supply the power to the display unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
Display unit 24VDC power supply
CP1A
1 +24V
2 0V 24VDC stabilized power
3 24VDC ±10%
GND
Cable
CP1A
Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (housing) Use a terminal available
1-175218-5 (contact) with the 24 VDC power
24VDC power supply
supply.
+24V (1) +24V
0V (2) 0V
FG
Make a jumper between 0 V
Recommended cable : A02B-0124-K830(5m) and FG to connect ground.
(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the 24VDC power supply side)
Part of the 24 VDC power input to CP1A can be taken out from CP1B by branching. CP1B connection is
as shown below. In this case, the rating of the external 24 VDC power supplied to CP1A must be the sum
of the power consumed within the display unit and that supplied to external equipment via CP1B. Up to
1.0 A can be supplied to the external equipment.
Display unit External device
CP1B
1 +24V
2 0V
3
Cable
CP1B
Tyco Electronics
2-178288-3 (housing)
Use terminals that match External
1-175218-5 (contact)
external devices used. device
+24V (1)
0V (2)
- 66 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
External
Stand-alone type power supply
control unit 24VDC±10%
Video cable
between units
External MDI cable
power supply between units
24VDC±10%
CA103
JA73
MDI unit
CA55 CK27
CP1A MDI
CP1B cable
2nddisplay unit
Connection to the control unit, between display units, and to the power
supply
An optical fiber cable is used to make the connection between the control unit and 1st display unit. Video
and MDI cables between units are used to make the connection between the 1st and 2nd display units. For
details of the optical fiber cable, see Appendix D.
Connect cables between units as follows. The maximum length of a cable between the 1st and 2nd display
units is 50 m.
- 67 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
JA73 JA73
PCR-E20MDA PCR-E20MDA
1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01 1 *KEY00 11 *KEY01
2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03 2 *KEY02 12 *KEY03
3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05 3 *KEY04 13 *KEY05
4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07 4 *KEY06 14 *KEY07
5 *COM00 15 *COM01 5 *COM00 15 *COM01
6 *COM02 16 *COM03 6 *COM02 16 *COM03
7 *COM04 17 *COM05 7 *COM04 17 *COM05
8 *COM06 18 *COM07 8 *COM06 18 *COM07
9 *COM08 19 *COM09 9 *COM08 19 *COM09
10 *COM10 20 *COM11 10 *COM10 20 *COM11
Cable
*KEY00 1 1 *KEY00
*KEY02 2 2 *KEY02
*KEY04 3 3 *KEY04
*KEY06 4 4 *KEY06
*COM00 5 5 *COM00
*COM02 6 6 *COM02
*COM04 7 7 *COM04
*COM06 8 8 *COM06
*COM08 9 9 *COM08
*COM10 10 10 *COM10
*KEY01 11 11 *KEY01
*KEY03 12 12 *KEY03
*KEY05 13 13 *KEY05
*KEY07 14 14 *KEY07
*COM01 15 15 *COM01
*COM03 16 16 *COM03
*COM05 17 17 *COM05
*COM07 18 18 *COM07
*COM09 19 19 *COM09
*COM11 20 20 *COM11
Shield
Recommended cable:
A02B-0323-K865 (50m)
A02B-0303-K848 (30m)
A02B-0303-K845 (20m)
A02B-0303-K846 (10m)
A02B-0303-K847 (5m)
Recommended cable–side connectors (JA73):
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Recommended wire specification:
A66L-0001-0284#10P(#28AWG × 10 pairs, maximum cable length: 50m)
- 68 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Connection of the video cable between units
If a severe noise environment is expected or the length of the video cable between units is longer than 30 m, be sure to
mount a ferrite core (A02B-0323-K869) between the 2nd display unit and ground plate on the 2nd display unit.
CA103 CA103
DV2R024N11 DV2R024N11
1 DVI2M 9 DVI1M 17 DVI0M 1 DVI2M 9 DVI1M 17 DVI0M
2 DVI2P 10 DVI1P 18 DVI0P 2 DVI2P 10 DVI1P 18 DVI0P
3 0V 11 0V 19 0V 3 0V 11 0V 19 0V
4 *BLOFFP 12 *RGBENM 20 4 *BLOFFP 12 *RGBENM 20
5 *BLOFFM 13 *RGBENP 21 5 *BLOFFM 13 *RGBENP 21
6 14 22 0V 6 14 22 0V
7 15 0V 23 DVICK1P 7 15 0V 23 DVICK1P
8 0V 16 24 DVICK1M 8 0V 16 24 DVICK1M
Cable
1 1
DVI2M DVI2M
2 2
DVI2P DVI2P
3 3
0V 0V
9 9
DVI1M DVI1M
10 10
DVI1P DVI1P
11 11
0V 0V
17 17
DVI0M DVI0M
18 18
DVI0P DVI0P
19 19
0V 0V
23 23
DVICKP DVICKP
24 24
DVICKM DVICKM
22 22
0V 0V
4 4
*BLOFFP *BLOFFP
5 5
*BLOFFM *BLOFFM
12 12
*RGBENM *RGBENM
13 13
*RGBENP *RGBENP
15 15
0V 0V
8 8
0V 0V
(Connector frame) Shield (Connector frame)
When connecting the video cable between units to each display unit, fix the
cable with the cable support plate attached with the unit.
- 69 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
Supply the power to the display unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
Display unit 24VDC power supply
CP1A(X)
1 +24V
2 0V 24VDC stabilized power
3 24VDC ±10%
GND
Cable
CP1A(X)
Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (housing) Use a terminal available with
1-175218-5 (contact) the 24 VDC power supply.
24VDC power supply
To share a power supply between the 1st and 2nd display units, see the figure below.
1st display unit 2nd display unit
Cable
CP1B (Y) CP1A (X)
Tyco Electronics Tyco Electronics
2-178288-3 (housing) 1-178288-3 (housing)
1-175218-5 (contact) 1-175218-5 (contact)
NOTE
For power-on and -off timing, see Section 4.2, “TURNING ON AND OFF THE
POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT”.
Make connection so that 24 VDC ±10% power is also supplied to the 2nd display
unit in the same way as for the 1st display unit.
NOTE
Be sure to use two MDI units of the same type when required.
- 70 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Note)
60mm
50mm 50mm
NOTE
100 mm (max) when the connector of the MDI cable between units is
spring-fixed or 60 mm (max) when it is screw-fixed.
- 71 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
CA55
MDI unit
CK27
CPD18 (Y)
1 +24V
2 0V 24VDC stabilized power
3 24VDC ±10%
GND
Cable
CPD18 (Y)
Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (housing) Use a terminal available with
1-175218-5 (contact) the 24 VDC power supply.
24VDC power supply
- 72 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
24V-IN(CPD19A)
DISPLAY(COP21A)
+24V (CPD18)
(Note 1)
Card slot
(Note 1)
I/O Link (JD1B)
USB mouse
USB keyboard
USB mouse
USB keyboard
NOTE
1 The I/O Link interface is optional.
2 On the display unit for automobile manufacturers, the MDI unit is built onto the
front panel.
- 73 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
CPD18 (Y)
1 +24V
2 0V 24VDC stabilized power
3 24VDC ±10%
GND
Cable
CPD18 (Y)
Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (housing) Use a terminal available with
1-175218-5 (contact) the 24 VDC power supply.
24VDC power supply
NOTE
1 Keep the power cable away from other cables connected to the display unit.
2 Turn the power to the display unit on or off within ±100 ms after the power to the
control unit is turned on or off.
USB port
The display unit for automobile manufacturers has two USB ports on its front panel. These USB ports can be
used to connect a USB memory, USB mouse, and USB keyboard.
CAUTION
1 While the control unit is accessing the USB memory, do not turn the power to the
control unit off or remove the USB memory.
2 Close the cover of a USB port when the USB port is not used.
3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V) current for the two USB ports is 500
mA in total.
- 74 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm+0 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
Xm+1 R8 R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1
L1 R1
L2 R2
L3 R3
L4 R4
L5 R5
L6 R6
L7 R7
L8 R8
B B
Rear
A A
90
- 75 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
5.3.1 Overview
An input/output device is used to enter information such as control unit programs and parameters from an
external device to the control unit, or to output information from the control unit to an external device.
The input/output devices usable with this control unit include Handy File.
The interface of the input/output devices electrically conforms to RS232-C, so that a connection can be
made with a device that has an RS232-C interface.
The tables below indicate the serial ports of this control unit.
Port name Interface location
1CH (JD56A) Main control unit
2CH (JD36A) Main control unit Note
The serial ports of the 15” LCD-mounted type control unit are as listed in the table below, however.
Port name Interface location
1CH (JD56A) Main control unit
2CH (JD54) Main control unit Note
NOTE
When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touch panel
communication on the control unit side, so that this port cannot be used as a
general-purpose port.
Punch panel
R232C-1 R232C-2
JD56A JD36A/JD54
- 76 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
NOTE
This interface is the RS232-C interface on the control unit side.
For these devices, the RS232-C interface on the control unit is used for the
following cases:
• Ladder monitoring, storing, or loading using FANUC LADDER III
• DNC operation via RS232-C, external I/O device control
• Input/output of parameters and programs by using the control unit screen
display function
Control unit
Relay connector
JD56A, JD36A/JD54 (DBM-25S)
FI80-20P, DF1R020WB1
(PCR-EV20MDT) 1 FG
14
2 SD
1 RD 11 SD 15
3 RD
2 0V 12 0V 16
>„ >„ < 4 RS
3 DR 13 ER 17
5 CS
4 0V 14 0V 18
6 DR
5 CS 15 RS 19
7 SG
6 0V 16 0V 20 ER
8 CD
7 CD 17 (*) 21
9
8 0V 18 (+5V)(*) 22
10
9 (*) 19 +24V 23
11
10 +24V 20 (+5V)(*) 24
12
25 +24V
13
NOTE
1 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal names are not indicated.
2 Pins 18 and 20 (+5V) are provided for touch channel connection.
3 The upper manufacturer and model on the control unit side are for the
LCD-mounted type.
The lower manufacturer and model in parentheses are for the stand-alone type.
4 Do not connect anything to pins 6 and 8 of JD54 on the 15” LCD-mounted type
control unit because these signals are reserved.
- 77 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
(FUJITSU COMPONENT)
NOTE
1 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal names are not indicated.
2 Recommended cable-side connector FI30-20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)
cannot be used for the stand-alone type.
- 78 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Output
SD (Send data)
RS (Request to Send)
When CS is not used short CS
and RS.
CS (Enable to send)
FG (Frame ground)
RS Output Sending This signal is set to on when control unit starts sending data and is turned
request off when transmission ends.
CS Input Sending When both this signal and the DR signal are set, the control unit can send
permitted data. If I/O device processing is delayed by a punching operation, etc.,
control unit data sending can be stopped by turning off this signal after
sending two characters, including the data being sent currently. If this signal
will not be used, make sure to strap this signal circuit to the RS signal
circuit.
DR Input Data set ready When I/O device is ready to operate, this signal is set. This signal should
usually be connected to the signal indicating I/O device power supply being
on. (ER signal (Note) of I/O device). See Note below.
The control unit transfers data when this signal is set. If the signals turned
off during data transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If the DR signal will not be
used, make sure to strap this signal circuit to the ER signal circuit.
ER Output Control unit This signal is set when the control unit is ready to operate. External device
ready to should regard the SD signal as being significant when the ER signal is set.
operation
CD Input Signal Since this signal is not used in connections with I/O device, the signal circuit
Condition must be strapped, inside the connecting cable, to the ER signal circuit.
SG Signal grounding
FG Frame grounding
- 79 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Signal on/off state is defined as follows;
-3V or lower +3V or higher
Function OFF ON
Signal Condition Marking Spacing
NOTE
Start-stop method:
With this method, start and stop signals are output before and after each data
bit.
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8
- Codes
Transmission codes are as follows:
(1) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4.
(2) ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4 (Optional ISO code input is necessary.)
The connected I/O device must be able to recognize the following control codes, sent from control
unit.
Control code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Tape reader start ○ ○ ○
DC2 Tape punch designation ○ ○ ○
DC3 Tape reader stop ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
DC4 Tape punch release ○ ○ ○
NOTE
The listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.
- 80 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
(c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the external device must
satisfy the specification shown in Table 5.3.4.
Table 5.3.4
ISO code EIA code Remarks
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 ○ ○ ● 0 ○ ● Number 0
1 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ 1 ● ○ Number 1
2 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ 2 ● ○ Number 2
3 ○ ○ ● ○ ○ 3 ○ ● ○ ○ Number 3
4 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ 4 ● ○ Number 4
5 ○ ○ ● ○ ○ 5 ○ ● ○ ○ Number 5
6 ○ ○ ● ○ ○ 6 ○ ● ○ ○ Number 6
7 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ 7 ● ○ ○ ○ Number 7
8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ● 8 ○ ● Number 8
9 ○ ○ ○ ● ○ 9 ○ ○ ● ○ Number 9
A ○ ● ○ a ○ ○ ● ○ Address A
B ○ ● ○ b ○ ○ ● ○ ? Address B
C ○ ○ ● ○ ○ c ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ Address C
D ○ ● ○ d ○ ○ ● ○ ? Address D
E ○ ○ ● ○ ○ e ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ? Address E
F ○ ○ ● ○ ○ f ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ Address F
G ○ ● ○ ○ ○ g ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Address G
H ○ ○ ● h ○ ○ ○ ● Address H
I ○ ○ ○ ● ○ i ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ Address I
J ○ ○ ○ ● ○ j ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ? Address J
K ○ ○ ● ○ ○ k ○ ○ ● ○ Address K
L ○ ○ ○ ● ○ l ○ ● ○ ○ ? Address L
M ○ ○ ● ○ ○ m ○ ○ ● ○ Address M
N ○ ○ ● ○ ○ n ○ ● ○ ○ Address N
O ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ o ○ ● ○ ○ Address O
P ○ ○ ● p ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Address P
Q ○ ○ ○ ● ○ q ○ ○ ○ ● Address Q
R ○ ○ ○ ● ○ r ○ ○ ● ○ Address R
S ○ ○ ● ○ ○ s ○ ○ ● ○ Address S
T ○ ○ ○ ● ○ t ○ ● ○ ○ Address T
U ○ ○ ● ○ ○ u ○ ○ ● ○ Address U
V ○ ○ ● ○ ○ v ○ ● ○ ○ ? Address V
W ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ w ○ ● ○ ○ Address W
X ○ ○ ○ ○ ● x ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Address X
Y ○ ○ ○ ● ○ y ○ ○ ○ ● ? Address Y
Z ○ ○ ○ ● ○ z ○ ○ ● ○ Address Z
DEL ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ Del ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ *
NUL ● Blank ● *
BS ○ ○ ● BS ○ ○ ● ○ *
HT ○ ● ○ Tab ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ *
LF or NL ○ ● ○ CR or ○ ●
EOB
CR ○ ○ ● ○ ○ *
SP ○ ○ ● SP ●○ *
% ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ER ○ ● ○ ○
( ○ ○ ● ( 2-4-5 ) ○ ○ ● ○
) ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ( 2-4-7 ) ○ ○ ● ○
+ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ + ○ ○ ○ ● *
- ○ ○ ● ○ ○ - ○ ●
: ○ ○ ○ ● ○
/ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ / ○ ○ ● ○
. ○ ○ ● ○ ○ . ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○
# ○ ○ ● ○ ○
$ ○ ● ○
& ○ ○ ● ○ ○ & ○ ● ○ ○ *
▽ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ *
* ○ ○ ○ ● ○ *
, ○ ○ ○ ● ○ , ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ *
; ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ *
< ○ ○ ○ ● ○ *
= ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ *
> ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ *
? ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○ *
@ ○ ○ ● *
” ○ ○ *
- 81 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the following
items must be noted in Table 5.3.4.
Control out (Comment field start)
Control in (Comment field end)
Condition1 Left parenthesis "("of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5
when used in the EIA code.
Right parenthesis ")"of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and
7 when used in the EIA code.
Condition2 EIA code CR is LF in ISO code.
Condition3 EIA code O is : in ISO code.
2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output from the control unit.
So they need not to be punched on the control unit tape.
Time chart when the control unit receives data (Read into memory)
(1) Control unit outputs DC1.
(2) The I/O device starts sending data upon receiving DC1.
(3) Control unit sends DC3 when control unit processing is delayed.
(4) The I/O device stops sending data to control unit after receiving DC3.
The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If it sends more than 10 characters,
alarm 087 will occur.
(5) Control unit reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing.
(6) The I/O device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code (the data must be the next data to
the preceding.)
(7) Control unit sends DC3 upon completing data read.
(8) The I/O device stops sending data.
- 82 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
ER
(output)
RS (output)
DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3
SD (output)
ER code
RD (input)
DR (input)
CS (input)
Up to 10 characters
1ms or longer
Time chart when the control unit send data (Punch out)
(1) Control unit output DC2.
(2) Control unit outputs punch data in succession.
(3) When data processing is delayed at the I/O device.
(a) Data output stops within two characters including a currently transmitting character when CS
signal is turned off.
When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts. (See Fig. 5.3.4 (b))
(b) If control code DC3 is input to control unit, control unit stops data output within ten characters.
When control code DC1 is input to control unit, control unit starts sending data again. (See Fig.
5.3.4 (c))
(4) The control unit starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on after the I/O device
completes data processing.
(5) The control unit issues DC4 upon completing data output.
10ms or longer 100ms or longer
ER (output)
RS (output)
DC2 DC4
SD (output)
RD (input)
CS (input)
- 83 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
ER (output)
RS (output)
DC2 DC4
SD (output)
DC3 DC1
RD (input)
Within 2 characters
DR (input)
CS (input)
1ms or longer
SD SD
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG FG
- 84 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
● Use the connection shown in the figure below when the ER and DR signals are not used for
handshaking.
Control unit I/O device side
side
SD SD
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG FG
The cable for connecting the I/O device to the control unit should be connected as shown in the below
diagram.
Serial interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
ER
DR
- 85 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
Control unit
JA40
FI80-20P, DF1R020WB1
(RCR-EV20MDT)
1 HDI0 11 HDI1
2 0V 12 0V
3 HDI2 13 HDI3
4 0V 14 0V
5 0V 15 HDI5
6 HDI4 16 0V
7 <> 17 HDI6
8 <> 18 0V
9 <> 19 HDI7
10 0V 20 0V
NOTE
1 The upper manufacturer and model of JA40 are for the LCD-mounted type.
The lower manufacturer and model in parentheses are for the stand-alone type.
2 No connections must be made to the pins with angle brackets (<>) because they
are reserved for expansions.
- 86 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
Cable connections
JA40
1
HDI0
2
0V
11
HDI1
12
0V
3
HDI2
4
0V
13
HDI3
14
0V
6
HDI4
5 or 10
0V
15
HDI5
16
0V
17
HDI6
18
0V
19
HDI7
20
0V
7
8
9
10
Shield
Ground plate
NOTE
The recommended cable connector FI30-20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)
cannot be used for the stand-alone type.
- 87 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
Control unit
DRIVER IiL/IiH FILTER RECEIVER
VH/VL
SHIELD
NOTE
1 The plus (+) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow into the receiver. The
minus (-) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow out of the receiver.
2 The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when the input voltage is at the
low level and 0 when it is at the high level.
3 The input level for the control unit receiver is high when the circuit is open. So,
the input level for the external driver must be low.
- 88 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
NOTE
To use the FL-net or Fast Ethernet interface, also refer to the FANUC FL-net
Board Connection Manual (B-64163EN) or FANUC Fast Ethernet/Fast Data
Server Operator’s Manual (B-64014EN), respectively.
Max. 100m
HUB
(line concentrator)
- 89 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 To connect the control unit to the 10BASE-T Ethernet interface, use a hub which
satisfies the following conditions:
- Supports 100BASE-TX.
- Has an auto-negotiation function.
- Supports store-and-forward switching.
2 The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for
movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary.
3 An Ethernet cable needs clamping to make system operation stable. For details
of clamping, see Subsection 3.4.6, “Cable Clamp and Shield Processing”. The
clamp for grounding the shield of the cable can also fix the cable.
Control unit
Ethernet cable
Clamp
Grounding plate
4 Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network are not
dust-proof. They should be enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet. Using them in an
atmosphere with dust or oil mist may lead to a communication error or failure.
- 90 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
1 TX+ 1 TX+
RJ-45
2 TX- modular jack 2 TX-
3 RX+ 3 RX+
4 4
5 5
6 RX- 6 RX-
7 7
8 8
Max. 100m
1
TX+
1 2
TX+ TX-
2 3
TX- RX+
3 6
RX+ RX-
6
RX-
Shield
NOTE
The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for
movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary.
Cable Wires
Many cables without a shield (UTP cables) are commercially available as twisted pair cables conforming
to 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX. To improve noise immunity in factory automation environments,
however, be sure to use twisted pair cables (STP cables) with a common shield in category 5.
NOTE
No cable recommended for use in fixed sections shall be used in movable
sections.
For movable sections, be sure to use the recommended cables for movable
sections listed below.
- 91 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
Specification
• Ordering specifications : A66L-0001-0453
• Electrical characteristic : Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5
• Structure : Common-shield braided cable with drain wire
The conductors of the cable are AWG26 annealed-copper strand wire, with a
sheath 0.8 mm thick and an outer diameter of 6.7 ± 0.3 mm
• Fire resistance : UL1581 VW-1
• Oil resistance : As per FANUC's internal standard (Equivalent to conventional oil-resistant
electrical cable)
• Flex resistance : Million or more bending cycles with a bending radius of 50 mm (U-shaped
bend test)
• UL style No. : AWM20276(80℃/30V/VW-1)
NOTE
When using this cable, keep the length between the control unit and hub within
50 m because of its attenuation performance. Be sure to use the
TM21CP-88P(03) connector manufactured by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Connector specification
An 8-pin modular connector called the RJ-45 is used with a twisted-pair cable for Ethernet interfaces. Use
the connector listed below or equivalent.
Manufacturer’s Manufacturer Remark
model number
Connector used with cable AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) TM21CP-88P(03) Hirose Electric (Note)
Co., Ltd.
NOTE
About TM21CP-88P(03)
Ordering specifications: A63L-0001-0823#P
Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5
Ask Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. for explanations about how to attach the connector
to a cable. (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. offers the TM21CP-88P(03) Wiring
Procedure Specification (Engineering Specification No. ATAD-E2367) to explain
the related technical information.)
- 92 -
B-64483EN/01 5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
[Example of connection]
NOTE
1 Ground the PC and backbone cable separately from the machine system.
If this is impossible because there is only one grounding point, use separate
grounding wires for the PC/backbone cable and the machine system up to the
grounding point.
The grounding resistance must not be higher than 100 Ω (class 3 grounding).
The grounding wire must not be thinner than the AC power line conductor, and
its cross-sectional area must not smaller than 5.5 mm2.
2 In some cases, the aforementioned isolation/separation method based on
10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX cannot assure normal communication because of
influence by noise. In such worst environments, use optical fiber media to
completely isolate the machine from the PC.
- 93 -
5.CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 For the connection of the USB port on the control unit with the personal
computer function with Windows® CE, see Chapter 11.
2 For the connection of the USB ports on the display unit for automobile
manufacturers, see Subsection 5.2.5.
3 This USB port is dedicated to a USB memory. Do not connect other USB
devices to the port.
4 It is not guaranteed that every commercially available USB memory can operate
normally. For example, a USB memory with a security function does not operate.
Some commercially available USB memories may not be designed for the use in
an FA environment.
CAUTION
1 While the control unit is accessing the USB memory, do not turn the power to the
control unit off or remove the USB memory.
2 Close the cover of the USB port when no USB memory is inserted.
3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V) current is 500 mA in total.
- 94 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
Control unit
COP10A-1 COP10A-2
Separate
detector interface
unit
- 95 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
This chapter describes how to connect the control unit to the servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and
separate detector interface units.
The control unit is connected to servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and separate detector interface units
via serial buses using optical fiber cables (called FSSBs below). Up to three FSSB lines can be connected
to the control unit. For the 1st and 2nd FSSB lines, optical connectors are located on the servo card of the
main board (some types of servo cards do not have an optical connector for the 2nd FSSB line). For the
3rd FSSB line, an optical connector is located on the additional axis board (an additional axis board may
not be mounted on the control unit because it is optional).
Slave units to be connected to the control unit must support the 30i-B series. Slave units include servo
amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and separate detector interface units.
Control unit
Slave unit
Servo card
2nd FSSB line 2)
COP10A-2
Servo amplifier
1st FSSB line 2)
COP10A-1 COP10B
Optical fiber cable COP10A
3)
COP10B
Maximum allowable cable length
COP10A
1) The total cable length on each line shall satisfy the following
conditions.
2) Between the control unit and 1st slave unit: 3) Spindle amplifier
- When A66L-6001-0026#~ is used: 50 m
- When A66L-6001-0049#~ is used: 100 m
COP10B
3) Between slave units: 40 m
Note: Slave units include servo amplifiers, spindle amplifiers, and COP10A
separate detector interface units.
Separate detector
interface unit
3)
COP10B
COP10A
- 96 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
<Optical fiber cable types>
Usage Cable drawing number Cable length
For internal A02B-0236-K851 to -K856 Length of 10 m or less
connection (A66L-6001-0023#~)
For external A66L-6001-0026#~ Length of 50 m or less (40 m or less between slave units)
connection A66L-6001-0049#~ Length of 100 m or less (40 m or less between slave units)
<Maximum number of servo axes and maximum number of spindle axes for control unit models>
Control mode and maximum number of servo axes Maximum
number of Remarks
HRV2 HRV3 HRV4
spindle axes
30i-B 32 axes 32 axes 10 axes 8 axes
31i-B/31i-B5 20 axes 20 axes 10 axes 6 axes
32i-B 10 axes 10 axes 6 axes HRV4 not usable
The maximum total number of servo and spindle axes and connector name for each line differ depending
on the FSSB line and control mode. See the table below.
<Maximum number of axes for each line (total number of servo axes and spindle axes)>
Control mode and maximum number of axes (servo
Connector
and spindle axes) Remarks
name
HRV2 HRV3 HRV4
1st FSSB line 28 axes 13 axes 6 axes COP10A-1 On the servo card
2nd FSSB line 12 axes 13 axes 6 axes COP10A-2 On the servo card
On the additional
3rd FSSB line ― 13 axes 6 axes COP10A-3
axis board
NOTE
1 The number of axes that can be controlled varies also depending on the
software series.
2 When the number of axes that was set for the first FSSB line is zero, no axes
can be set for the second FSSB line.
3 Unused optical connectors must be covered with the caps.
- 97 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
Since the total number of servo and spindle axes is 20, which exceeds the maximum allowable number of
axes for each line in HRV3 (13), two FSSB lines are used.
Control unit
6.3.1 Overview
Separate detector interface
unit
Digital output
Linear encoder or rotary encoder
Basic unit
Digital output
Linear encoder or rotary encoder
When a separate detector such as a separate rotary encoder or linear encoder is used, a separate detector
interface unit is required. The separate detector interface unit is connected through an optical fiber cable
as an unit on an FSSB line.
- 98 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
A separate detector interface unit consists of a separate detector I/F unit for basic four axes (called a basic
unit below) and a separate detector I/F unit for additional four axes (called an additional unit below) (the
additional unit may not be provided). The basic and additional units are connected through a flat cable.
Up to four separate detectors can be connected for each of the basic and additional units. A separate
detector refers to a detector that outputs A and B rectangular waveforms (parallel) or a FANUC serial
interface output detector (serial).
The maximum number of separate detector interface units that can be connected to an FSSB line is 4 for
HRV2, 2 for HRV3, and 1 for HRV4 regardless of the control unit model, software series, and servo card
type.
Therefore, for HRV2, up to 32 separate detectors can be connected for each line.
In addition to the digital input type of parallel/serial basic unit as described above, the analog input type
of analog basic unit is also available.
When a basic unit is solely described in this chapter, it refers to a basic unit of the digital input type.
NOTE
1 The feedback from the separate detector interface unit connected to the first or
second FSSB line is available for the full-closed loop control of the axis
connected to the first or second FSSB line. But it is not available for the control
of the axis connected to the third FSSB line.
2 The feedback from the separate detector interface unit connected to the third
FSSB line is available for the full-closed loop control of the axis connected to the
third FSSB line. But it is not available for the control of the axis connected to the
first or second FSSB line.
3 In the mode other than HRV2, the separate detector interface unit must not be
connected to the FSSB line which no servo axis is connected to.
4 All units of a separate detector interface unit must support the 30i-B series.
5 Unused optical connectors must be covered with the caps.
- 99 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
COP10B
COP10A
Spindle amplifier
COP10B
Optical fiber cable
COP10A
Flat cable
Separate detector interface unit (additional unit)
- 100 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
CP11A
24 VDC regulated power
1 +24V supply
2 0V 24 VDC ±10%
3
GND
Cable
CP11A
Tyco Electronics
1-178288-3 (housing) Use a terminal available with the
1-175218-5 (contact) 24 VDC power supply.
External power supply
The 24 VDC input to CP11A can be output at CP11B for use in branching. A cable with the same
specifications as for CP11A can be connected to connector CP11B. In this case, the power supplied to
CP11A should be equal to the sum of the rating of the separate detector interface unit and that of the units
after CP11B. A current of up to 1.5 A can be supplied via CP11A.
Be sure to ground the 0-V line of the power supply to the separate detector interface unit. In addition,
keep any noise source (such as an AC power cable and contactor) away from the power line of the
separate detector interface unit as far as possible to prevent noise from being picked up through the power
line.
For all units of the separate detector interface unit, secure the ground line to the ground terminal (GND)
for signals, which is located at the bottom of each unit, with an M3 screw as shown in the figure below.
Connect the ground line to the ground plate of the cabinet.
- 101 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
GND
NOTE
The torque with which a screw is tightened is 0.5 N⋅m or less.
- 102 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
1 SD 11
2 *SD 12 0V
3 13
4 14 0V
5 REQ 15
6 *REQ 16 0V
7 (+6V) 17 The +6V signal is provided for absolute
8 18 +5V position detectors that require battery backup.
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
Cable connection
1
SD SD
2
*SD *SD
5
REQ REQ
6
*REQ *REQ
7
(+6V) (+6V)
18,9
+5V +5V
20
+5V +5V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16 Shielded drain wire
0V FG
Shield
(Frame
Ground plate ground)
Recommended cable:
A66L-0001-0286(#20AWG×6+#24AWG×3-pair)
Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex)
FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
1 The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the detectors. The supply
current per detector is 0.35 A maximum.
The lower limit of the 5V signals is 4.95 V for the basic unit or 4.9 V for the
additional unit. Determine the specifications and length of the cable to be used
so that the specification of the detector is not exceeded.
- 103 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
NOTE
2 Ask the manufacturer of each detector whether it supports the FANUC serial
interface.
1 PCA 11
2 *PCA 12 0V
3 PCB 13
4 *PCB 14 0V
5 PCZ 15
6 *PCZ 16 0V
7 (+6V) 17
8 (REQ) 18 +5V The +6V and REQ signals are provided for
9 +5V 19 absolute position detectors that require
10 20 +5V
battery backup.
Cable connection
1
PCA PCA
2
*PCA *PCA
3
PCB PCB
4
*PCB *PCB
5
PCZ PCZ
6
*PCZ *PCZ
7
(+6V) (+6V)
8
(REQ) (REQ)
9
+5V +5V
18
+5V +5V
20
+5V +5V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate
Recommended cable:
A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG×6 + #24AWG×3-pair)
Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex)
FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)
- 104 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the detectors. The supply
current per detector is 0.35 A maximum.
The lower limit of the 5V signals is 4.95 V for the basic unit or 4.9 V for the
additional unit. Determine the specifications and length of the cable to be used
so that the specification of the detector is not exceeded.
B phase signal
A phase signal
Shift in minus direction
B phase signal
*PCZ
0.5V
PCZ
Tw
TOFF
Z 相信号
- 105 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
Time requirements
Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF101 to JF108. The signals for these
connectors are differential input signals with A and B phases. An important factor is time Td from point
A, when the potential difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B, when the potential
difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lower than 0.5V. The minimum value of Td is 0.15 μs. The
period and pulse width of the signals must be long enough to satisfy the above requirements.
The Z phase signals are also differential signals. There are the following requirements for the time from
when the potential difference between PCZ and *PCZ exceeds 0.5 V to when it becomes lower than 0.5
V:
Receiver circuit
PCA
A-phase 110Ω
signal
*PCA
560Ω The same circuit is used for the
B-phase signals (PCB and *PCB) and
one-rotation signals (PCZ and *PCZ).
5V
Digital output
Control unit or the Linear encoder or rotary encoder
previous-stage servo
amplifier or spindle amplifier
Analog 1Vp-p output
Optical fiber cable Linear encoder or rotary encoder
- 106 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
To use a separate detector with an analog output of 1 Vp-p requires an analog basic unit, which is a basic
unit of the analog input type. The analog basic unit is connected as a unit on the FSSB line via an optical
fiber cable.
Up to four separate detectors with an analog output of 1 Vp-p can be connected to an analog basic unit.
Four separate detectors with digital output can be connected to the additional unit regardless of whether
an analog or digital basic unit is used.
NOTE
1 The feedback from the separate detector interface unit connected to the first or
second FSSB line is available for the full-closed loop control of the axis
connected to the first or second FSSB line. But it is not available for the control
of the axis connected to the third FSSB line.
2 The feedback from the separate detector interface unit connected to the third
FSSB line is available for the full-closed loop control of the axis connected to the
third FSSB line. But it is not available for the control of the axis connected to the
first or second FSSB line.
3 In the mode other than HRV2, the separate detector interface unit must not be
connected to the FSSB line which no servo axis is connected to.
4 All units of a separate detector interface unit must support the 30i-B series.
5 Unused optical connectors must be covered with the caps.
6 No 1-Vp-p output detector can be connected to additional units.
COP10B
COP10A
Spindle amplifier
COP10B
Optical fiber cable
COP10A
- 107 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
(2) When encoders with an analog output of 1 Vp-p are connected to the 5th to 8th axes
Optical fiber cable
(3) When encoders with an analog output of 1 Vp-p and digital output encoders are connected to the 1st
to 4th axes
Optical fiber cable
- 108 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
(4) When encoders with an analog output of 1 Vp-p are connected to the 1st to 4th axes and digital
output encoders are connected to the 5th to 8th axes
Optical fiber cable
Flat cable
Separate detector interface unit (additional unit)
NOTE
When a separate absolute position detector that requires battery backup is
connected to an additional unit, a battery case for the separate absolute pulse
coder must be connected to JA4A on the analog basic unit. The battery voltage
is supplied to the additional unit via the flat cable.
- 109 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
JF111~JF114
(PCR-EV20MDT)
1 A 11 NC(ADIF)
2 XA 12 0V
3 B 13 NC(BDIF)
4 XB 14 0V
5 Z 15 NC(T0)
6 XZ 16 0V Leave NC (No Connection) open.
7 17
8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 NC(PZ)
10 20 +5V
Cable connection
1
A A
XA 2 XA
3
B B
4
XB XB
5
Z Z
6 XZ
XZ
9
+5V +5V
18
+5V +5V
20
+5V +5V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16 Shielded drain wire
0V FG
(Frame
Shield ground)
Ground plate
Recommended cable:
A66L-0001-0286 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3-pair)
Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex)
FI40B-2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTE
The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to the detectors. The supply
current per detector is 0.35 A maximum.
The lower limit of the 5V signals is 4.95 V for the basic unit or 4.9 V for the
additional unit. Determine the specifications and length of the cable to be used
so that the specification of the detector is not exceeded.
- 110 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
0V
VXA b/2
VXB
VOA,VOXA
0V VOB,VOXB
* The detection precision depends on the precision of signals from the encoder.
- 111 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
(2) Connection
Connect the check pin board to the cable of which axis you want to observe the signals.
JA4A
⑤ ④ ③ ② ①
⑩ ⑨ ⑧ ⑦ ⑥
⑮ ⑭ ⑬ ⑫ ⑪
⑳ ⑲ ⑱ ⑰ ⑯
CN1 CN2
- 112 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
When a separate absolute position detector that requires battery backup is connected, a battery case for
the separate absolute pulse coder must be connected to JA4A on the basic unit (or analog basic unit).
The battery voltage is supplied to the additional unit via the flat cable.
- 113 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
Cable connection
JA4A Battery case
7 +
+6V +6V
3 -
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate
Recommended cable material:
2
≧0.2mm (7/0.18)
Recommended connectors:
PCR-E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30-20S (Hirose Electric)
FCN-247J020-G/E (FUJITSU COMPONENT)
52622-2011 (Molex)
CAUTION
If the cable is connected to JA4A when the separate absolute pulse coder
battery case contains the battery, the battery voltage is applied to the battery
power supply pin (+6V) for each of the feedback connectors (JF105 to JF108). In
this case, if the battery line and 0 V are short-circuited, the battery may heat up
or the protection circuit within the separate detector interface unit may fail. First,
make sure the battery case contains no battery or the cable is not connected to
JA4A. Then, complete all cabling work and confirm cables are correctly
connected. Finally, place the battery or connect the cable to JA4A.
- 114 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
CNF1 CNF2
Marking
▼ mark
▼ mark
Place an order on a flat cable together with separate detector interface units.
GND
- 115 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
GND
For the outside dimensions, see Appendix A, “OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS AND
CONNECTORS”.
- 116 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
6.3.12 Installation
1) Notes on installation
(1) Use an interface unit in a completely enclosed cabinet.
(2) Install an interface unit on a vertical surface, and provide a space of 100 mm above and below
the unit. Below an interface unit, do not place equipment that generates a large amount of heat.
(3) When using a basic unit (or analog basic unit) and additional unit, place the units as shown
below so that the flat cable connecting the units does not block the vent holes on the basic unit
(or analog basic unit). A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.
When using both a basic unit (or analog basic unit) and additional unit, install the units as shown above,
with the mounting holes horizontally separated by 70 to 80 mm.
- 117 -
6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES B-64483EN/01
- 118 -
B-64483EN/01 6.SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES
Installing the unit on the DIN rail
Installing the unit on
the DIN rail
DIN rail
DIN rail
DIN rail
When the unit is
installed on the DIN
rail, do not pull the unit
upward.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the lock by applying excessive force to the installed
unit. When installing and removing the unit, hold the upper and lower ends of the
unit so that stress is not applied to the side (surface with the slits) of the unit.
When the unit is installed on the DIN rail, do not pull the unit upward, or the case
may be damaged.
- 119 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
7.1 OVERVIEW
The I/O Link i and I/O Link are a serial interface which connects the control unit, I/O Unit-MODEL A,
Power Mate, and other units and transfers I/O signals (bit data) at high speed between units. In I/O Link i
and I/O Link control, there are the master station and its slave stations. The master is the control unit, and
the slaves are other I/O units.
The status of input signals from the slaves is sent to the master at specified intervals. Output signals from
the master are also sent to the slaves at specified intervals.
With the I/O Link i, the communication transfer rate is increased, compared to the I/O Link. More signals
and slaves (groups) can be connected.
- 120 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
The FS30i-B series has a total of three channels of I/O Link i and I/O Link interfaces. When only the I/O
Link i is used, up to two channels can be used. When only the I/O Link is used, up to three channels can
be used.
Number of channels available for the I/O Link i and I/O Link
Item I/O Link I/O Link i
Number of available channels Up to 3 Up to 2
* The I/O Link i and I/O Link can be used simultaneously by selecting the I/O Link i and I/O Link for
each channel. For details, see Section 7.2, “Connection”, below.
7.2 CONNECTION
With the FS30i-B series, interface connector for the I/O Link i and I/O Link JD51A (for three channels) is
located on the main board. For channels 1 and 2 of these three channels, the I/O Link i or I/O Link can be
selected. Channel 3 is available only for the I/O Link. Each of channels 1 and 2 is used for the I/O Link i
or I/O Link according to the parameter setting. According to the initial setting, channels 1 and 2 are used
for the I/O Link. For the parameter setting, refer to the FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B PMC
Programming Manual (B-64513EN).
In I/O control, there are the master station and its slave stations. The master is the control unit, and the
slaves are other I/O units. The slaves are divided into groups. Up to 24 slave groups can be connected to
one channel with the I/O Link i. Up to 16 slave groups can be connected with the I/O Link.
The I/O Link i and I/O Link are connected in different ways depending on the types of units actually used
and the number of I/O signals. Therefore, the assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made
programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/O signals available for each channel is
2048/2048 for the I/O Link i and 1024/1024 for the I/O Link.
Up to 4096/4096 signals in total can be used for the entire system. Within this range of the total number
of signals, the I/O Link i or I/O Link can be selected for each channel.
NOTE
1 The total number of I/O signals that can be used differs depending on the model.
2 All units connected to the channel used for the I/O Link i must support the I/O
Link i.
Do not connect any unit dedicated to the I/O Link i to the channel used for the
I/O Link.
An I/O unit has I/O Link i and I/O Link interface connectors JD1A and JD1B. All units with the I/O Link
i or I/O Link function have these connectors. A cable must always be connected from JD1A to JD1B.
Although connector JD1A on the last unit is not used and left open, it is not necessary to connect JD1A
with a terminator.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all units with the I/O Link i or I/O
Link function. They are described in Subsection 7.2.1. Fig. 7.2 shows a connection diagram of the I/O
Link i or I/O Link.
- 121 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Control unit
Group 0
I/O Link i or I/O Link
JD51A JD1B
JD1A
Group 1
JD1B
JD1A
Maximum number of I/O signals per group
Magnetic circuit
I/O Link i : 512 / 512
I/O Link : 256/256 Group 2
JD1B
Maximum number of groups per channel
I/O Link i (normal mode): 24 JD1A
I/O Link i (high-speed mode): 5
I/O Link: 16
Group n
The I/O Link i and I/O Link are connected by an electric cable (Subsection 7.2.1) or by an optical fiber
cable (Subsection 7.2.2). When an electric cable is used, the maximum cable length between units is 10 m.
When the cable is laid within the same cabinet(NOTE), however, the maximum length is 15 m. The
maximum cable length between units can be extended to 200 m with optical fiber cables using an optical
adapter.
If any of the following conditions is satisfied, use an optical fiber cable for connecting units:
NOTE
Different cabinets connected at low impedance by a closed metal duct can be
assumed to be one cabinet.
- 122 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
1 The +5 V terminals in parentheses are for supplying the power to an optical
adapter to be used for connection by an optical fiber cable. Do not connect the
+5 V terminals when using no optical adapter.
2 Do not connect the pins in brackets. They are used for connecting channels 2
and 3 with JD51A.
3 Do not connect any pin for which no signal is assigned.
4 Take sufficient measures against noise. See Section 3.4, “Countermeasures
against Noise and Grounding”.
Cable wiring
1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate
- 123 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Connection
Connecting cable Optical Connecting cable Connecting cable Optical Connecting cable
between units fiber cable between units between units fiber cable between units
JD51A/JD1A JD1 COPx COPx JD1 JD1B JD1A JD1 COPx COPx JD1 JD1B JD1A
[]
[] []
[] []
[]
[]
[]
NOTE
1 The length of the cable for connecting units must not exceed 2 m (when the
recommended wire material is used).
2 Do not connect the pins in brackets. They are used for connecting channels 2
and 3 with JD51A.
3 Do not connect any pin for which no signal is assigned.
- 124 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
Optical adapter A13B-0154-B101 is for the I/O Link i. They cannot be used for
the I/O Link.
The following table lists the specifications of the optical adapter for the I/O Link.
Maximum
Maximum
number of Relay with an optical
Specifications Type transmission Weight
connectab fiber relay adapter
distance
le stages
200m 5 None About
A13B-0154-B001 Normal type
100m 5 Up to one point 100g
High-speed About
A13B-0154-B004 100m 16 None
type 100g
NOTE
1 Optical adapters A13B-0154-B001 and A13B-0154-B004 are for the I/O Link.
They cannot be used for the I/O Link i.
2 Both high-speed- and normal-type adapters cannot be used on the same I/O
Link line.
3 When a high-speed type optical adapter is used, the optical fiber relay adapter
cannot be used.
The specifications of the optical fiber cable are A66L-2001-0026#~. For details, see Appendix D.
The specification of the optical fiber relay adapter is A63L-0020-0002. For its external dimensions, see
Appendix D.
Optical connector
COP23 (for I/O Link i)
FANUC COP1 (for I/O Link)
45
18
Unit: mm
- 125 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
7.2.3 Connection When Multiple Channels of the I/O Link i and I/O
Link Are Used
With the FS30i-B series, up to two channels of the I/O Link i interface or up to three channels of the I/O
Link interface can be used. This feature allows the number of I/O points to be increased to 4096 (4096
input points and 4096 output points).
Signals for three channels are assigned to the connector (JD51A) on the main board. When using only
channel 1, see Subsection 7.2.1.
When using the channel 2 and channel 3, use the I/O Link branching adapter for two channels or the I/O
Link branching adapter for three channels to branch the I/O Link i or I/O Link.
NOTE
A maximum of eight groups can be connected to the FANUC I/O Unit-Model B
with three channels.
Connection
JD44B Channel 1
JD51A JD1A-1
I/O Link i or I/O Link
Channel 2
JD1A-2
I/O Link i or I/O Link
Specification of the 2ch I/O Link signal divider: A20B-1007-0680 (Weight: 60g)
- 126 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Connection between the main board and 2ch I/O Link signal divider
(such as PCR-E20MDK-SL-A)
NOTE
1 The +5 V terminals in parentheses are for supplying the power to an optical
adapter to be used for connection by an optical fiber cable. Do not connect the
+5 V terminals when using no optical adapter.
2 Do not connect the pins in brackets. These signals are used for connecting
channel 3.
3 Do not connect any pin for which no signal is assigned.
Cable connection
2ch I/O Link signal
Main board divider
JD51A JD44B
1 3
SIN1 SOUT1
2 4
*SIN1 *SOUT1
3 1
SOUT1 SIN1
4 2
*SOUT1 *SIN1
5 7
SIN2 SOUT2
6 8
*SIN2 *SOUT2
7 5
SOUT2 SIN2
8 6
*SOUT2 *SIN2
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
0V 0V
18 18
(+5V) (+5V)
20 20
(+5V) (+5V)
9 9
(+5V) (+5V)
Shield
Ground plate
- 127 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Connection between the 2ch I/O Link signal divider and I/O units
The 2ch I/O Link signal divider can be connected to I/O units in the same way as for the I/O Link i and
I/O Link. See Subsection 7.2.1.
Cable length
LA
JD51A JD44B
LB
JD1A-1 JD1B
JD1A-2
NOTE
The total of LA and LB must not exceed 10 m, where LA is the length of the cable
between connector JD51A on the main board and connector JD44B on the 2ch
I/O Link signal divider, and LB is the length of the cable between connector
JD1A-1 or JD1A-2 on the 2ch I/O Link signal divider and connector JD1B on the
I/O unit. When all cables are laid within the same cabinet, however, a total cable
length of up to 15 m is allowed.
- 128 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
34
23
45
85
Unit:mm
Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection and routing of cables.
35
25
Unit: mm
2) Screwing
The following figure shows drilling on the plate.
11.6
2-M4
70
Unit: mm
- 129 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Specification of the 3ch I/O Link signal divider: A20B-1008-0360 (Weight: 80g)
Connection between the main board and 3ch I/O Link signal divider
(such as PCR-E20MDK-SL-A)
NOTE
The +5 V terminals in parentheses are for supplying the power to an optical
adapter to be used for connection by an optical fiber cable.
Do not connect the +5 V terminals when using no optical adapter.
- 130 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Cable connection
3ch I/O Link signal
Main board divider
JD51A JD51B
1 3
SIN1 SOUT1
2 4
*SIN1 *SOUT1
3 1
SOUT1 SIN1
4 2
*SOUT1 *SIN1
5 7
SIN2 SOUT2
6 8
*SIN2 *SOUT2
7 5
SOUT2 SIN2
8 6
*SOUT2 *SIN2
17 19
SIN3 SOUT3
16 10
*SIN3 *SOUT3
19 17
SOUT3 SIN3
10 16
*SOUT3 *SIN3
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
0V 0V
9 9
(+5V) (+5V)
18 18
(+5V) (+5V)
20 20
(+5V) (+5V)
Shield
Ground plate
Connection between the 3ch I/O Link signal divider and each channel
The 3ch I/O Link signal divider can be connected to I/O units in the same way as for the I/O Link i and
I/O Link. However, note the following points:
Connector JD44A-1 outputs channel 1 and 2 signals (I/O Link i or I/O Link) and connector JD44A-2
outputs channel 2 signals (I/O Link i or I/O Link) and channel 3 signals (I/O Link).
Connector JD1A is dedicated to I/O Link channel 3.
- 131 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
1) When the I/O Link i or I/O Link is branched to three channels, normal I/O cables are used for
JD44A-1, JD44A-2, and JD1A. Channel 1 corresponds to JD44A-1, channel 2 corresponds to
JD44A-2, and channel 3 corresponds to JD1A.
2) When channels 1 and 2 are extended together, the 2ch I/O Link signal divider must be connected to
JD44A-1 to branch channel 1 and channel 2 at the end of the adapter. JD1A is used as channel 3.
JD44A-2 is not used.
3) When channels 2 and 3 are extended together, the2ch I/O Link signal divider must be connected to
JD44A-2 to branch to channel 2 and channel 3 at the end of the adapter. JD44A-1 is used as channel
1. JD1A is not used.
JD44A-2 Channel 2
JD1A Channel 3
JD1A-2 Channel 2
JD44A-2
JD1A Channel 3
JD1A-2 Channel 3
JD1A
- 132 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Connection between the 3ch I/O Link signal divider and 2ch I/O Link signal
divider
3ch I/O Link signal divider 2ch I/O Link signal divider
(PCR-E20MDT)
NOTE
1 The +5 V terminals in parentheses are for supplying the power to an optical
adapter to be used for connection by an optical fiber cable. Do not connect the
+5 V terminals when using no optical adapter.
2 Do not connect any pin for which no signal is assigned.
Cable connection
3ch I/O Link signal 2ch I/O Link signal
divider divider
JD44A–1 JD44B
1 3
SIN1 SOUT1
2 4
*SIN1 *SOUT1
3 1
SOUT1 SIN1
4 2
*SOUT1 *SIN1
5 7
SIN2 SOUT2
6 8
*SIN2 *SOUT2
7 5
SOUT2 SIN2
8 6
*SOUT2 *SIN2
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
0V 0V
9 9
(+5V) (+5V)
18 18
(+5V) (+5V)
20 20
(+5V) (+5V)
Shield
Ground plate
Cable length
JD44A-2
JD1A
NOTE
The total of LA and LB must not exceed 10 m; where LA is the length of the cable
between connector JD51A on the main board and connector JD51B on the 3ch
I/O Link signal divider, and LB is the length of the cable between connector
JD44A-1, JD44A-2, or JD1A on the 3ch I/O Link signal divider and connector
JD1B on the I/O Unit. When all cables are accommodated in the same cabinet,
however, a total cable length of up to 15 m is allowed.
45
34
23
105
Unit: mm
Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection and routing of cables.
- 134 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
35
25
Unit: mm
2) Screwing
The following figure shows drilling on the plate.
11.6
2-M4 90
Unit: mm
- 135 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Control unit
Extension module
Extension module
Operator’s
Basic module
IF module
(Slot 10)
(Slot 1)
(Slot 2)
(Slot 3)
(Slot 4)
(Slot 5)
(Slot 6)
(Slot 7)
(Slot 8)
(Slot 9)
panel I/O
module
Manual pulse
generator
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 4
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10
Assignment for the I/O Link i Slot 6
Slot 1
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10
Slot 6
CAUTION
The emergency stop signal (*ESP) must be a DI signal at an address for which
the common voltage is fixed to 24 V so that it functions to the safety side if a
failure such as cable disconnection occurs.
- 136 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Examples of fixed addresses the control unit directly monitors
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X004 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X005
X006
X007
X008 *ESP
X009 *DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The following figure shows an example of assigning fixed signals to I/O modules for connector panel
connected to the I/O Link.
When DI addresses are assigned in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004
X007
X008 Basic module *ESP fixed signals
X009 *DECn fixed signals
X010
Extension module
X011
1
X012
X013
Extension module
X014
2
X015 Use the minimum configuration consisting of the basic
X016 module only. Use extension modules 1, 2, and 3 as
Extension module required. In the minimum configuration, SKIP and other
X017
3 fixed signals and the manual pulse generator interface of
X018
extension module 1 cannot be used. In this case, however,
X019 (for 1st MPG) the *DECn fixed signal can always be used and the *ESP
Extension module
X020 (for 2nd MPG) fixed signal can be assigned to an address for which the
1
X021 (for 3rd MPG) common voltage is fixed to 24 V in the minimum
configuration.
X022 (DO alarm detection) Basic module
- 137 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 138 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Cable connection
Terminal Manual pulse
block generator
#1
1 7 Red 5
HA1 HA1 HA1
2 7 White 6
HB1 HB1 HB1
9 5 Red 3
+5V +5V +5V
12 2 Black 4
0V 0V 0V
3 8 Red 5 #2
HA2 HA2
4 8 Black 6 HA2
HB2 HB2
18 4 Red 3 HB2
+5V +5V
14 3 Black 4 +5V
0V 0V
0V
5 9 Black 5
HA3 HA3 #3
6 9 White 6
HB3 HB3 HA3
20 6 Red 3
+5V +5V HB3
16 1 Black 4
0V 0V +5V
Shield 0V
Ground plate
Cable Wire
- 139 -
7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
The number of connectable manual pulse generators depends on the type and
option configuration.
Therefore, the cable length can be determined using the following expression.
m
L≤
R
As an example, obtain the cable length when recommended cable wire A66L-0001-0286 is used.
This cable wire has three paired signal wires and six power connection wires. Since the electric resistance
of a power connection wire is 0.0394 Ω/m, if three wires are used for 0 V and 5 V, the cable length is:
3
L ≦ = 76.75[m]
0.0394
According to the FANUC specifications, however, the maximum transmission distance of a pulse signal
from a manual pulse generator must not exceed 50 m.
Therefore, when one manual pulse generator is connected, the maximum cable length is 50 m.
The maximum cable length is:
When two manual pulse generators are connected 38.37 m
When three manual pulse generators are connected 25.58 m
T1
HAn
T1
T1
4
HBn
T1 T1
4 4
Pulse for the + direction
- 140 -
B-64483EN/01 7.CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
The following figure shows the receiver circuit for signals in the manual pulse generator.
Manual pulse
generator +5V
Filter
10kΩ
R
Connector
–
+
C
0V 0V
Internal receiver
circuit
The points (thresholds) at which the input signal to the receiver changes are:
3.7 V or higher when the input signal state changes from the low level to the high level
1.5 V or lower when the input signal state changes from the high level to the low level
- 141 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 142 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Available
Detailed
Unit for the Description
description
I/O Link i
Handy machine operator's Compact handy operation panel, used for operation Connection
panel on the machine side, that consists of the manual Manual
pulse generator, emergency stop switch, enable B-63753EN
switch, display unit, and input key.
I/O Link-AS-i converter Converter unit for connecting AS-i (Actuator Sensor Section 8.9
Interface), which is an I/O level open network.
NOTE
1 To use a unit listed in the table above that supports the I/O Link i, be sure to
specify a unit of the ordering specifications described in the relevant section.
2 The I/O Link i and I/O Link can be used simultaneously for each channel. For
details, see Section 7.2.
- 143 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.2.1 Configuration
As shown in the figure below, an I/O module for connector panel consists of the basic module and
extension modules (up to three modules).
Direction to be
used when the
Direction to be used modules are
when the modules mounted using
are connected DIN rails or
directly to the screws
connection
printed circuit board
Extension module 3
JD1A
JD1B Extension module 2
Basic module
I/O Link cable
NOTE
Be sure to install I/O modules for connector panel so that the basic module and
extension modules are placed as shown in the figure above.
When the modules are directly connected to the connection printed circuit board
designed by the machine tool builder:
Install the extension modules to the right of the basic module on the
installation plane.
When the modules are installed using DIN rails or screws:
Install the extension modules to the left of the basic module on the
installation plane.
- 144 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
JD1B
JD1A
CA137 CB150
Manual pulse
generator
+24V power
Manual pulse supply
generator
JA3
DI/DO L1
module
Manual pulse
generator
CA138
Machine side
Connector panel
CB150 DI/DO
CA137
Extension module 1
Note 1
(with MPG )
2A output
CA138 module
CB154
CA137
Extension module 2
Analog input
CA138
module
CB157
CA137
Extension module 3
NOTE
Extension modules A, B, C, and D can be installed in any position of
extension modules 1, 2, and 3. If a manual pulse generator interface is
required, however, be sure to install extension module A in extension module
1. Other modules cannot be installed in extension module 1.
- 145 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Be sure to use modules with the ordering specifications listed above in
combination. Do not use other modules.
For the specifications (such as signal input requirements) specific to each module, see the relevant pages
of each item.
Installation conditions
(1) Use each I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.
(2) Use the units under the following ambient temperature conditions:
Operation: 0°C to 55°C
Storage and transportation: -20°C to 80°C
(3) For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.
(4) For ventilation within each I/O module, each module must be installed in shown below. Moreover,
for ventilation and wiring, allow a clearance of 100 mm or more above and below each module.
Never place a device that generates a large amount of heat below an I/O module.
(5) Install the basic module and extension modules so that the connection flat cables lie on the top of
them. Also ensure that the flat cable does not block the vent holes on the basic unit. (See Subsection
8.2.8.)
Upper side
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Basic module
(6) Install the basic module and extension modules so that they are placed as shown in the figure in
Subsection 8.2.1.
- 146 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
• When the modules are directly connected to the connection printed circuit board designed by
the machine tool builder:
Install the extension modules to the right of the basic module on the installation plane.
• When the modules are installed using DIN rails or screws:
Install the extension modules to the left of the basic module on the installation plane.
NOTE
1 The above power supply rating does not include that to be input to DOCOM for
DO output.
2 To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and
JD1B on the basic module, the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required
for the power supply of the basic module.
- 147 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
CAUTION
Pins 18 and 50 (+24V) of connector CB150 are used to apply +24 V externally to
a module. Be sure to connect these pins because the +24 V is used internally.
Also be sure to connect pins 19 to 23 (0V).
- 148 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
As listed in the table below, Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI pins for which a
common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0 CB150(24)
pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input with its logical state
reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect as
inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection of the
DICOM0 CB150(24) pin to the 0 V power supply is recommended wherever
possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed
(from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the input is “0”. For the
unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common voltage can be selected
(from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7), the input is “0” when the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply or “1” when it is connected to the +24 V power
supply. Connect DICOM0 when used. When addresses from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7
are not used, connect DICOM0 to the 0 V power supply.
Common voltage for the basic module, and extension modules A and B
Address Common voltage
Xm Can externally be selected with DICOM0.
Xm+1 Cannot be selected.
Xm+2 Cannot be selected.
- 149 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 150 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
ON
DOCOM
OFF
DO state when DO is ON
on in the sequence OFF
DO state when DO is ON
off in the sequence OFF
NOTE
When DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state of DOCOM is directly reflected
in the DO state as indicated above by the dashed box.
CAUTION
Be sure to connect the bit at the same address for parallel connection.
Do not connect three or more signals in parallel.
- 151 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
DOCOM
CB150(01),(33)
+24V 0V
+24 V regulated
power supply
Relay
DV
DV
CB150(HONDA MRH-50RMAST)
- 152 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
- 153 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 154 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
1 In the diagram above, n represents each channel (n = 1, 2, 3, 4).
2 Current input or voltage input can be selected on a channel-by-channel basis.
For current input, be sure to connect JMPn to INPn.
3 For the connection, use a shielded twisted pair.
4 In the diagram above, the shield of each channel is connected to FGNDn, and
FGND is used for shield processing of all channels. However, the shield of a
channel may be directly connected to frame ground with a cable clamp, instead
of using FGNDn.
- 155 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
5 If the voltage (current) source has a GND pin, as shown in the figure above,
connect COMn to this pin. Otherwise, connect INMn and COMn together in the
analog input module.
Resolution 5 mV or 20 μA
Overall precision Voltage input: ±0.5% With respect to full scale
Current input: ±1%
Maximum input ±15V/±30mA
voltage/current
Minimum conversion time [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O
module] and [ladder scan period (depending on
CNC)] needs to be considered.
Number of occupied DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes
input/output points (Note)
NOTE
Extension module D (analog input module) has four input channels. The digital
output section consists of a group of 12 bits within the three-byte occupied input
points. This means that the channel to be used can be dynamically selected by the
ladder. The channel switching DO point for channel selection is included in the
two-byte occupied output points.
(Channel selection)
With extension module D (analog input module), which of the four analog input channels is to be the
target of A/D conversion must be determined with a PMC program. The DO points used for this selection
are CHA and CHB (two-byte occupied output points). These are mapped as indicated below.
- 156 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Address in the module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Yn X X X X X X X X
Yn+1 X X X X X X CHB CHA
Yn is the first address to which the analog input module is allocated.
By writing the values indicated below to CHA and CHB, the corresponding channel is selected, and the
A/D converted data of the channel and the data of the selected channel can be read as DI data. The
character X indicated above represents an unused bit, so that either 1 or 0 may be written in place of X.
CHB CHA Channel selected
0 0 Channel 1
0 1 Channel 2
1 0 Channel 3
1 1 Channel 4
(Address)
A/D conversion data of the channel selected by the above setting is output to two bytes of the three bytes
of DI (input signals) of the slot to which this module is allocated. The A/D conversion data output
addresses are as shown below, depending on where extension module D (analog input module) is installed.
• When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 1 (slot 2)
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm2(odd-numbered address) Undefined
Xm2+1(even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm2+2(odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08
Xm2 is the start address of slot 2.
• When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 2 (slot 3)
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm3(even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm3+1(odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08
Xm3+2(even-numbered address) Undefined
Xm3 is the start address of slot 3.
• When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 3 (slot 4)
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm4(odd-numbered address) Undefined
Xm4+1(even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm4+2(odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08
Xm4 is the start address of slot 4.
- 157 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
D00 to D11 represent 12-bit digital output data. D00 corresponds to weighting of 20 and D10 corresponds
to that of 210.
D11 is a sign bit expressed as a two’s complement. CHA and CHB represent an analog input channel.
This means that when the two bytes above are read with a PMC program, the A-D converted data of the
input channel represented by CHA and CHB can be read from D11 to D00.
NOTE
When two-byte digital output addresses are to be referenced with a PMC
program, a read must always be performed word-by-word (16 bits).
NOTE
To use extension module A having a manual pulse generator interface, connect
the module next to the basic module.
- 158 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
CA137
CA138
CA137
CA137
CA138
- 159 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Install the basic module and extension modules so that they are placed as shown
in the figure above.
- When the modules are directly connected to the connection printed circuit
board designed by the machine tool builder:
Install the extension modules to the right of the basic module on the
installation plane.
- When the modules are installed using DIN rails or screws:
Install the extension modules to the left of the basic module on the installation
plane.
To ensure adequate ventilation, install the modules in such a way that the flat
cables lie on top of them.
The basic module has a vent at the top (as indicated by the dotted lines in the
above figure). Install the modules so that the flat cable does not block the vent.
Be sure to connect the flat cable from CA137 on a module to CA138 on the next
module.
7
57.1
R2
106
89
No. 1 pin
注) Square hole
6
Prohibited area on
component side
3
I/O Link
10
Prohibited area on interface
I/O interface
soldered side
MPG interface
Dimensions of connector panel
(for extension module)
printed circuit board ±0.2 JD1A JD1B
Connector panel printed circuit board connector specification: HONDA MRH-50FDST (50-pin female straight connector without fitting)
When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly (external module view and mounting
diagram)
- 160 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
1 A connector with a fitting (HONDA MRH-50RMAST) is used for the module-side
I/O interface. Always use a connector having no fitting for the connector panel
printed circuit board.
2 Area where pattern printing is prohibited
: Prohibited area on soldered side
: Prohibited area on component side
Hook
Stopper
connector panel
printed circuit board
When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly (mounting and dismounting a module)
NOTE
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom
surfaces. Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
- 161 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
JD1B
Note)
JD1A
I/O interface
MPG interface
(for extension module)
When mounting a DIN rail (external module view and mounting diagram)
NOTE
Recommended connector:
A02B-0098-K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR-50F solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR-50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material:
A66L-0001-0042(7/0.18, 50 pins)
- 162 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
When dismounting the module, take care not to damage the stopper by applying
excessive force with the screwdriver.
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom
surfaces. Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
- 163 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Screw
holes
I/O interface
MPG interface
(for extension module)
JD1A JD1B
When mounting a module using screws (external module view and mounting diagram)
NOTE
Recommended connector:
A02B-0098-K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR-50F solder type)
(Case: HONDA MR-50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material:
A66L-0001-0042(7/0.18, 50 pins)
- 164 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Xm2 Yn2
Extension module 1 Slot 2
Xm2 + 1 Extension module 1 Slot 2 Yn2 + 1
Xm2 + 2
Xm3 Yn3
Extension module 2 Slot 3
Xm3 + 1 Extension module 2 Slot 3 Yn3 + 1
Xm3 + 2
Xm4 Yn4
Extension module 3 Slot 4
Xm4 + 1 Extension module 3 Slot 4 Yn4 + 1
Xm4 + 2
Xm1, Xm2, Xm3, Xm4, Xmmpg, Yn1, Yn2, Yn3, and Yn4 indicate the start address at allocation.
Each module is treated as a slot and addresses are allocated for each module. When only the basic module
is used, allocate 3-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO addresses to slot 1. When extension modules are
added, allocate 3-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO addresses to slots 2, 3, and 4.
An I/O module for connector panel has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual
pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three
manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators).
Do not use the DI space with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.
NOTE
1 Be sure to allocate addresses to the basic module. (DI: 3 bytes, DO: 2 bytes)
2 Extension module C (2A output module) has no DI signals. For connection to the
I/O Link i, it is not necessary to allocate addresses to the DI section of extension
module C.
- 165 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Xm Yn
Basic module Basic module
Xm+1 Yn+1
Xm+2 Yn+2
Extension module 1
Xm+3 Yn+3
Extension module 1
Xm+4 Yn+4
Extension module 2
Xm+5 Yn+5
Xm+6 Yn+6
Extension module 2 Extension module 3
Xm+7 Yn+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Extension module 3
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Extension module 1
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm Basic module
detection)
For connection to the I/O Link, allocate addresses to the basic module and extension modules at a time.
Addresses Xm+12 to Xm+14 are allocated to manual pulse generator and address Xm+15 is allocated to
the DO alarm regardless of whether an extension module is used. For this reason, allocate DI addresses in
units of 16 bytes.
Do not use the DI space with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.
NOTE
Extension module C (2A output module) involves no DI signals. For connection
to the I/O Link, the DI addresses allocated to the 2A output module cannot be
used. When a 2A output module is installed in extension module 2, for example,
addresses Xm+6 to Xm+8 cannot be used. (The addresses for other modules
are not shifted. In this case, the DI addresses for extension module 3 remain
Xm+9 to Xm+11.)
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
- 166 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
This function is not supported by the extension module C (2A output module) or
extension module D (analog input module).
- 167 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
By changing the setting (rotary switch) for the expansion modules, connections can be made by omitting
some expansion modules (slots) as shown below.
Extension module 1
Extension module 3
Extension module 2
Extension module 1
Extension module 3
Extension module 1
Extension module 3
Extension module 2
Extension module 2
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
(slot 1)
(slot 2)
(slot 4)
(slot 3)
(slot 1)
(slot 4)
(slot 1)
(slot 2)
(slot 4)
(slot 3)
(slot 3)
(slot2)
Extension module 1 (slot 2) is Extension module 2 (slot 3) is Extension module 1 (slot 2) and
omitted. omitted. extension module 2 (slot 3) are omitted.
The setting position of the control (rotary switch) has the following meaning.
Setting position Meaning of setting
0 This is the standard setting. The rotary switch is factory-set to this position. This setting is used
when no expansion module is omitted.
1 Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to this position when the preceding expansion
module is omitted.
2 Set the rotary switch on an expansion module to this position when the preceding two
expansion modules are omitted.
3 to F This setting is prohibited.
- 168 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Extension module 1
Extension module 3
Extension module 2
keep the rotary switch set to setting position 0.
(slot 2)
(slot 4)
(slot 3)
Extension module 1
Extension module 3
Extension module 2
(slot 4)
(slot 3)
Extension module 3
Extension module 2
(slot 2)
(slot 4)
(slot 3)
NOTE
Extension module A is fitted with an additional rotary switch as other types of
modules are modified. However, extension module A is always mounted at the
location of extension module 1, so that its factory setting need not be changed.
- 169 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
I/O UNIT
CNC JD1B
JD51A
JD1B
JD1A
CE53
Manual pulse
generator
CE54
NOTE
The following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the main board of
control unit, cannot be used to connect the I/O Link i or manual pulse generator.
- 170 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
CPD1(IN)
01 +24V
24 V power 02 0V
supply
03
CPD1(OUT)
01 +24V
24 V power 02 0V
supply
03
NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN) is the same as that for
CPD1 (OUT). There are no indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish
between the IN and OUT connectors.
- 171 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and CE54 (B02) is for DI signals.
Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
- 172 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
- 173 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Xm+1.0 through Xm+1.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected.
That is, by connecting the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI
signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected
to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this
from occurring, the connection of the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the 0 V power
supply is recommended whereever possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed
(from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7), the input is “0”. For the unconnected pins at the
addresses for which a common voltage can be selected (from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7),
the input is “0” when the COM1 CE54(A02) pin is connected to the 0 V power
supply or “1” when it is connected to the +24 V power supply. Connect COM1
when used. When addresses from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 are not used, connect
COM1 to the 0 V power supply.
CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and CE54 (B02) is for DI signals.
Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
- 174 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
Detour prevention diodes must be incorporated for matrix signal input, as shown in
the following figure. Otherwise, only two signals can be input at the same time.
Inputting three or more signals simultaneously without using detour prevention
diodes may result in data input errors.
*KCMn
*KYDn
- 175 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 176 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
- 177 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 178 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
- 179 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
5-φ3.2
65
95 95
24 V power supply
connection Weight: 170g
Manual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connection
Operator's panel DI/DO interface
Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear face of the printed circuit
board. Ensure that printed circuit boards are spaced 5 mm or more from one
another to prevent interference.
: : Polarity guide
: : A1 pin mark
- 180 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
8.3.9 Specifications
Installation specifications
Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.
Ordering specifications
Item Ordering specifications Remarks
I/O module for operator's panel A03B-0824-K200
Fuse (spare parts) A03B-0815-K001 1A
Module specifications
Item Specification Remarks
General-purpose DI 16 points 24-V input
Matrix DI 56 points (8 × 7) 5-V input
DO points 56 points (8 × 7) 24 V source type output
MPG interface Max. 3 units
NOTE
To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and
JD1B, the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required.
- 181 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
When detour prevention diodes are used, the voltage drop across closed contacts
indicated above must be maintained, including the diode voltage drop.
NOTE
Be sure to connect all DO power supply pins DOCOM.
- 182 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Xm General-purpose Yn
Xm+1 input signal Yn+1
Xm+2 Yn+2
Reserved
Xm+3 Yn+3 Output
Xm+4 Yn+4 signal
Xm+5 Yn+5
Xm+6 Matrix input signal Yn+6
Xm+7 Yn+7 Reserved
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11 Reserved
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Manual pulse
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
generator
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm (DO alarm detection)
detection)
For connection to the I/O Link, addresses are allocated to general-purpose input signals, matrix input
signals, manual pulse generators, and DO alarm detection at a time. For this reason, allocate DI addresses
in units of 16 bytes.
Do not use the DI space with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals)
For ON/OFF of the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), see Subsection
8.2.4.4.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Information output to the system relay area
Description
Slot number Alarm information number Alarm data bit 0 data
1 0 1 Yn1 error
- 183 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 184 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
I/O UNIT
CNC
JD1B
I/O Link i
JD51A
JD1B
JD1A
CE56
Manual pulse
generator
CE57
NOTE
The following screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the main board of
control unit, cannot be used to connect the I/O Link i or manual pulse generator.
- 185 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
CPD1(IN)
DOCOM
01 +24V
24 V power 02 0V
supply
03
CPD1(OUT)
01 +24V
24 V power 02 0V
supply
03
NOTE
The specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN) is the same as that for
CPD1 (OUT). There are no indications on the printed circuit board to distinguish
between the IN and OUT connectors.
- 186 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CE56 (B01) and CE57 (B01) is for DI signals.
Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
- 187 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 188 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
- 189 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 190 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 and Xm+5.0 through Xm+5.7 are DI pins for which a
common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0 CE56(A14)
or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input
with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has
the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring,
the connection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins to the 0
V power supply is recommended whereever possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed,
the input is “0”. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common
voltage can be selected, the input is “0” when the DICOMx common select pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply or “1” when it is connected to the +24 V power
supply. Connect DICOM0 and DICOM5 when used. When addresses from
Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 and Xm+5.0 to Xm+5.7 are not used, connect DICOM0 and
DICOM5 to the 0 V power supply.
Common voltage for general-purpose DI
Address Common voltage
Xm Can be selected with DICOM0.
Xm+1 Cannot be selected.
Xm+2 Cannot be selected.
Xm+3 Cannot be selected.
Xm+4 Cannot be selected.
Xm+5 Can be selected with DICOM5.
CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CE56 (B01) and CE57 (B01) is for DI signals.
Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
- 191 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 192 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
- 193 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
5-φ3.2
65
95
95
24 V power supply
connection
Manual pulse generator connection Weight: 180g
I/O Link signal connection
Operator's panel DI/DO interface
Note) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear face of the
printed circuit board. Ensure that the printed circuit boards are
spaced 5 mm or more from one another to prevent interference.
: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark
- 194 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
8.4.8 Specifications
Installation specifications
Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.
Ordering specifications
Item Ordering specifications Remarks
DI : 48 points
I/O module for operator’s panel
A03B-0824-K202 DO : 32 points
(with MPG interface)
With MPG interface
DI : 48 points
I/O module for power magnetics cabinet
A03B-0824-K203 DO : 32 points
(without MPG interface)
Without MPG interface
Fuse (spare parts) A03B-0815-K001 1A
Module specifications
Item Specification Remarks
DI points 48 points 24-V input
DO points 32 points 24 V source type output
MPG interface Max. 3 units For A03B-0824-K202
NOTE
To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and
JD1B, the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required.
- 195 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Be sure to connect all DO power supply pins DOCOM.
Basically, for this I/O module, allocate 6-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 4-byte DO addresses to slot 1.
An I/O module for operator’s panel has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual
pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three
manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators).
Do not use this area with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.
Xm Yn
Input signal
Xm+1 Yn+1 Output
Xm+2 Yn+2 signal
Xm+3 Yn+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6 Not used
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG) Manual pulse
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG) generator
Xm+15(DO alarm DO alarm
detection) detection
For connection to the I/O Link, addresses are allocated to input signals, manual pulse generators, and DO
alarm detection at a time. For this reason, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Do not use the DI space with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.
- 196 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals)
For ON/OFF of the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), see Subsection
8.2.4.4.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Slot number Alarm information number Address of the DO driver which detects an error
1 0 Yn1
1 1 Yn1+1
1 2 Yn1+2
1 3 Yn1+3
- 197 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.5.1 Configuration
I/O module for connector panel type-2 consists of the basic module and up to one extension module as
shown in the figure below.
Installed on
connector panel
PC board
Basic module
NOTE
As shown in the figure above, be sure to install the basic module to the left of the
extension module, viewed from the side of the flat cable for connecting modules.
This unit cannot be installed on the DIN rail.
In a maximum configuration, one basic module plus one expansion module can
be installed per group as shown above (DI/DO=96/64).
- 198 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Basic module
Fuse
Connector for
inter-module connection
(CA140)
Front Rear
Extension module
Connector for
inter-module Connector for connector
connection (CA141) panel PC board connection
(CB162)
Front Rear
- 199 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
CNC or preceding
I/O Link slave unit Following I/O Link
slave unit
JD1B
JD1A(JD51A)
JD1B
JD1A
Manual pulse
JA3
Connector panel
generator
CB161
Manual pulse +24V
generator CA140 power
CA141
DI/DO on
machine
CB161 side
Expansion module
NOTE
The maximum configuration of a group consists of one basic module plus one
expansion module as shown above. At this time, the number of input points is 96,
and the number of output points is 64. To add points, connect an additional slave
onto the I/O Link.
- 200 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
Be sure to use modules with the ordering specifications listed above in
combination. Do not use other modules.
Installation conditions
(1) Use this I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.
(2) Use the units under the following ambient temperature conditions:
Operation: 0°C to 55°C
Storage and transportation: -20°C to 80°C
(3) For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.
(4) For ventilation within each I/O module, allow a clearance of 40 mm or more between modules.
Moreover, allow a clearance of 50 mm or more above and below each module. Never place a device
that generates a large amount of heat below an I/O module.
(5) When mounting I/O modules, ensure that the basic module is mounted on the left side when viewed
from the flat cable.
NOTE
1 The above power supply rating does not include that to be input to DOCOM for
DO output.
2 To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and
JD1B on the basic module, the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required
for the power supply of the basic module.
- 201 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 Each of Xm and Yn represents the start address of the module on the I/O Link.
2 The A32, B32, and C32 pins of each connector are used to feed 24 V to the
module externally. Be sure to connect these pins. Be sure to connect the A30,
A31, B30, B31, C30, and C31 pins to the 0 V power supply.
- 202 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Address number
Pin number
Bit number
Xm+0.0 RV
CB161(C29)
Xm+0.1 RV CB161(A28)
Xm+0.2 RV CB161(B28)
Xm+0.3 RV CB161(C28)
Xm+0.4 RV CB161(A27)
Xm+0.5 RV CB161(B27)
Xm+0.6 RV CB161(C27)
Xm+0.7 RV CB161(A26)
CB161(A31,B31,C31,
0V
A30,B30,C30)
Xm+1.0 RV
CB161(B26)
Xm+1.1 RV
CB161(C26)
Xm+1.2 RV
CB161(A25)
Xm+1.3 RV
CB161(B25)
Xm+1.4 RV
CB161(C25)
Xm+1.5 RV
CB161(A24)
Xm+1.6 RV
CB161(B24)
Xm+1.7 RV
CB161(C24)
+24V 0V
0V +24 V stabilized
power supply
- 203 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Address number
Pi n number
Bit numb er
Xm+2.0 RV
CB161(A23)
Xm+2.1 RV
CB161(B23)
Xm+2.2 RV
CB161(C23)
Xm+2.3 RV
CB161(A22)
Xm+2.4 RV
CB161(B22)
Xm+2.5 RV
CB161(C22)
Xm+2.6 RV
CB161(A21)
0V
Xm+3.0 RV
CB161(C21 )
Xm+3.1 RV
CB161(A20)
Xm+3.2 RV
CB161(B20)
Xm+3.3 RV
CB161(C20 )
Xm+3.4 RV
CB161(A19)
Xm+3.5 RV
CB161(B19)
Xm+3.6 RV
CB161(C19 )
Xm+3.7 RV
CB161(A18)
CB161(A31,B31,C31,
0V
A30,B30,C30)
+24V 0V
+24V stabilized
power supply
- 204 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Address number
Pin number
Bit number
Xm+4.0 RV
CB161(B18)
Xm+4.1 RV
CB161(C18)
Xm+4.2 RV
CB161(A17)
Xm+4.3 RV
CB161(B17)
Xm+4.4 RV
CB161(C17)
Xm+4.5 RV
CB161(A16)
Xm+4.6 RV
CB161(B16)
Xm+4.7 RV
CB161(C16)
0V
Xm+5.0 RV
CB161(A15)
Xm+5.1 RV
CB161(B15)
Xm+5.2 RV
CB161(C15)
Xm+5.3 RV
CB161(A14)
Xm+5.4 RV
CB161(B14)
Xm+5.5 RV
CB161(C14)
Xm+5.6 RV
CB161(A13)
Xm+5.7 RV
CB161(B13)
CB161(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)
0V
+24V 0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply
- 205 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Address number
Pin number
Bit number
Xm+6.0 RV
CB162(C29)
Xm+6.1 RV
CB162(A28)
Xm+6.2 RV
CB162(B28)
Xm+6.3 RV
CB162(C28)
Xm+6.4 RV
CB162(A27)
Xm+6.5 RV
CB162(B27)
Xm+6.6 RV
CB162(C27)
Xm+6.7 RV
CB162(A26)
CB162(A31,B31,C31,
0V A30,B30,C30)
Xm+7.0 RV
CB162(B26)
Xm+7.1 RV
CB162(C26)
Xm+7.2 RV
CB162(A25)
Xm+7.3 RV
CB162(B25)
Xm+7.4 RV
CB162(C25)
Xm+7.5 RV
CB162(A24)
Xm+7.6 RV
CB162(B24)
Xm+7.7 RV
CB162(C24)
+24V 0V
0V +24 V stabilized
power supply
- 206 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Address number
Pin number
Bit number
Xm+8.0 RV
CB162(A23)
Xm+8.1 RV
CB162(B23)
Xm+8.2 RV
CB162(C23)
Xm+8.3 RV
CB162(A22)
Xm+8.4 RV
CB162(B22)
Xm+8.5 RV
CB162(C22)
Xm+8.6 RV
CB162(A21)
Xm+8.7 RV
CB162(B21)
0V
Xm+9.0 RV
CB162(C21)
Xm+9.1 RV
CB162(A20)
Xm+9.2 RV
CB162(B20)
Xm+9.3 RV
CB162(C20)
Xm+9.4 RV
CB162(A19)
Xm+9.5 RV
CB162(B19)
Xm+9.6 RV
CB162(C19)
Xm+9.7 RV
CB162(A18)
CB162(A31,B31,C31,
0V A30,B30,C30)
+24V 0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply
- 207 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Address number
Pin number
Bit number
Xm+10.0 RV
CB162(B18)
Xm+10.1 RV
CB162(C18)
Xm+10.2 RV
CB162(A17)
Xm+10.3 RV
CB162(B17)
Xm+10.4 RV
CB162(C17)
Xm+10.5 RV
CB162(A16)
Xm+10.6 RV
CB162(B16)
Xm+10.7 RV
CB162(C16)
0V
Xm+11.0 RV
CB162(A15)
Xm+11.1 RV
CB162(B15)
Xm+11.2 RV
CB162(C15)
Xm+11.3 RV
CB162(A14)
Xm+11.4 RV
CB162(B14)
Xm+11.5 RV
CB162(C14)
Xm+11.6 RV
CB162(A13)
Xm+11.7 RV
CB162(B13)
CB162(A31,B31,C31,
A30,B30,C30)
0V
+24V 0V
+24 V stabilized
power supply
- 208 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
A common voltage can be selected for DI signals at Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, Xm+3.0
to Xm+3.7, Xm+6.0 to Xm+6.7, and Xm+9.0 to Xm+9.7. That is, by connecting the
DICOM0, DICOM3, DICOM6, and DICOM9 pins to the +24 V power supply, a DI
signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected
to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent
such accidents, the connection of these pins to the 0 V power supply is
recommended wherever possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed,
the input is “0”. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common
voltage can be selected, the input is “0” when the DICOMx common select pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply or “1” when it is connected to the +24 V power
supply. Connect DICOM0, DICOM3, DICOM6, and DICOM9 when used. When
the corresponding address input is not used, connect the DICOM pins to the 0 V
power supply.
- 209 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
DOCOM01 CB161(A01,B01)
Yn+0.0 CB161(C01)
Relay
DV
Yn+0.1 DV CB161(A02)
Yn+0.2 DV CB161(B02)
Yn+0.3 DV CB161(C02)
Yn+0.4 DV CB161(A03)
Yn+0.5 DV CB161(B03)
Yn+0.6 DV CB161(C03)
Yn+0.7 DV CB161(A04)
Yn+1.0 DV CB161(B04)
Yn+1.1 DV CB161(C04)
Yn+1.2 DV CB161(A05)
Yn+1.3 DV CB161(B05)
Yn+1.4 DV CB161(C05)
Yn+1.5 DV CB161(A06)
Yn+1.6 DV CB161(B06)
Yn+1.7 DV CB161(C06)
CB161(A31,B31,C31,
0V A30,B30,C30)
- 210 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Pin number
DOCOM23
CB161(A07,B07)
+24V 0V
Address number +24 V stabilized
Bit number power supply
Yn+2.0 CB161(C07)
Relay
DV
Yn+2.1 DV
CB161(A08)
Yn+2.2 DV
CB161(B08)
Yn+2.3 DV
CB161(C08)
Yn+2.4 DV
CB161(A09)
Yn+2.5 DV
CB161(B09)
Yn+2.6 DV
CB161(C09)
Yn+2.7 DV
CB161(A10)
Yn+3.0 DV CB161(B10)
Yn+3.1 DV CB161(C10)
Yn+3.2 DV CB161(A11)
Yn+3.3 DV CB161(B11)
Yn+3.4 DV CB161(C11)
Yn+3.5 DV CB161(A12)
Yn+3.6 DV CB161(B12)
Yn+3.7 DV CB161(C12)
CB161(A31,B31,C31,
0V A30,B30,C30)
- 211 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Pin number
DOCOM45
CB162(A01,B01)
Yn+4.0 CB162(C01)
Relay
DV
Yn+4.1 DV
CB162(A02)
Yn+4.2 DV
CB162(B02)
Yn+4.3 DV
CB162(C02)
Yn+4.4 DV
CB162(A03)
Yn+4.5 DV
CB162(B03)
Yn+4.6 DV
CB162(C03)
Yn+4.7 DV
CB162(A04)
Yn+5.0 DV
CB162(B04)
Yn+5.1 DV
CB162(C04)
Yn+5.2 DV
CB162(A05)
Yn+5.3 DV
CB162(B05)
Yn+5.4 DV
CB162(C05)
Yn+5.5 DV
CB162(A06)
Yn+5.6 DV
CB162(B06)
Yn+5.7 DV
CB162(C06)
CB162(A31,B31,C31,
0V A30,B30,C30)
- 212 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Pin number
DOCOM67
CB162(A07,B07)
Yn+6.0 CB162(C07)
Relay
DV
Yn+6.1 DV
CB162(A08)
Yn+6.2 DV
CB162(B08)
Yn+6.3 DV
CB162(C08
Yn+6.4 DV
CB162(A09)
Yn+6.5 DV
CB162(B09)
Yn+6.6 DV
CB162(C09)
Yn+6.7 DV
CB162(A10)
Yn+7.0 DV
CB162(B10)
Yn+7.1 DV
CB162(C10)
Yn+7.2 DV
CB162(A11)
Yn+7.3 DV
CB162(B11)
Yn+7.4 DV
CB162(C11)
Yn+7.5 DV
CB162(A12)
Yn+7.6 DV
CB162(B12)
Yn+7.7 DV
CB162(C12)
CB162(A31,B31,C31,
0V A30,B30,C30)
- 213 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals)
For ON/OFF of the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), see Subsection
8.2.4.4.
+24V CB161(A32,B32,C32)
CB162(A32,B32,C32)
+24V 0V
+24V stabilized power supply
CB161(A31,B31,C31, A30,B30,C30)
0V CB162(A31,B31,C31, A30,B30,C30)
- 214 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
40 mm
A1 pin mark
34-pin flat cable
I/O Link i
connector
NOTE
When installing a flat cable, ensure that all pins are connected on a one-to-one
basis.
The modules must be spaced at least 40 mm apart.
In this case, the length of the flat cable is about 35 mm. When the modules are
separated furthermore, the length of the flat cable is:
35 mm + (module spacing - 40 mm)
Note, however, that the maximum allowable flat cable length is 300 mm.
- 215 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 216 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and
bottom surfaces. Avoid applying force to the sides (where slits are provided).
Hook
A
C
Stopper
B
- 217 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Printing prohibited
area on solder side
(14×5)
Printing
prohibited area
on component
side (4 - 5×3)
MRF-96MD
A1 pin
Printing
prohibited area
on solder side
(14×3)
- 218 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
50mm
10mm 10mm
Basic
Expansion module
module
50mm
NOTE
1 To ensure adequate ventilation within an I/O module, allow a clearance of 50
mm or more above and below the module and a clearance of 10 mm or more on
the left and right sides. Never place a device that generates a large amount of
heat below an I/O module.
2 To the front panel of an I/O module, the cables for the I/O Link i and manual
pulse generator are connected.
For cabling, allow a clearance of about 70 mm at the front of an I/O module.
3 Space the basic module and extension modules at least 40 mm apart from each
other.
4 An I/O module is secured to the connector panel by inserting the hook into a
hole on the connector panel as with the current distribution I/O module. Allow a
clearance for hooking on the rear side of the connector panel.
5 For securing an I/O module, four printing prohibited areas are provided on the
surface of the connector panel, and a printing prohibited area is also provided
beside the upper and lower square holes on the rear side.
6 When mounting the basic module and extension modules side by side, ensure
that the basic module is mounted on the left side when viewed from the I/O Link i
connector.
7 When inserting an I/O module into the connector panel, provide pedestals at
positions nearest to the connector of the connector panel to support the top and
bottom areas of the connector from the rear side to protect the connector panel
from being warped.
8 Ensure that the thickness of the connector panel printed circuit board is 1.7 mm
±0.1 mm.
- 219 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Dimensions of the connector (HONDA MRF-96FDST) for the connector panel printed circuit board
(Part order specification drawing number: A03B-0815-K030)
<1>
<2>
<3>
Unit: mm
<1> Insulator
<2> Locking hardware
<3> Contact
- 220 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Xm2 Yn2
Xm2 + 1 Yn2 + 1 Extension
Slot 2
Xm2 + 2 Extension Yn2 + 2 module
module Slot 2
Xm2 + 3 Yn2 + 3
Xm2 + 4
Xm2 + 5
Xm1, Xm2, Xmmpg, Yn1, and Yn2 indicate the start address at allocation.
For the I/O Link i, each module of I/O module for connector panel type-2 is treated as a slot and addresses
are allocated for each module. When only the basic module is used, allocate 6-byte DI addresses and
4-byte DO addresses to slot 1. When an extension module is used, allocate 6-byte DI addresses and 4-byte
DO addresses to slot 2.
I/O module for connector panel type-2 has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual
pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three
manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators).
Do not use these addresses with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.
For connection to the I/O Link, allocate addresses to the basic module and extension modules at a time.
Addresses Xm+12 to Xm+14 are allocated to manual pulse generator and address Xm+15 is allocated to
the DO alarm regardless of whether an extension module is used. For this reason, allocate DI addresses in
units of 16 bytes.
Do not use the DI space with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.
- 221 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Address of the DO driver
Slot number Alarm information number Location
which detects an error
1 0 Yn1 Basic module
1 1 Yn1+1 Basic module
1 2 Yn1+2 Basic module
1 3 Yn1+3 Basic module
2 0 Yn2 Extension module
2 1 Yn2+1 Extension module
2 2 Yn2+2 Extension module
2 3 Yn2+3 Extension module
- 222 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
8.6.1 Overview
The terminal type I/O module has the following features:
• Input/output signals are connected on a spring-type terminal block (ferrule terminal block).
• A terminal block can be attached to or detached from the main body of the module.
• An LED for state indication is provided for each I/O signal.
• The terminal type I/O module can be installed on the DIN rail.
• By using extension modules, the maximum number of digital input points can be extended to 96 and
the maximum number of digital output points can be extended to 64.
• An extension module with a manual pulse generator (MPG) interface is available.
CAUTION
Extension modules D and E have no LED for state indication.
CNC, etc.
Up to 3 extension
modules can be
connected.
Input Output Input Output
24 points 16 points 24 points 16 points
CAUTION
An I/O link slave unit may not operate normally due to a CNC, I/O Link slave
unit, or input power failure. To prevent accidents even in this case, design the
machine to operate safely by making a safety circuit outside the I/O Link slave
unit.
- 223 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
CAUTION
A cable-side terminal block is shipped with the main unit. Spare terminal blocks
are used for replacement.
For the specifications (such as signal input requirements) specific to each module, see the relevant pages
of each item.
CAUTION
Be sure to use modules with the ordering specifications listed above in
combination. Do not use other modules.
- 224 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Digital output
Number of points 16 points
Common 8 points/common (8 common terminals)
Rated output voltage 12 VDC to 24 VDC (+20%, −15%)
Rated output current 0.2A/pt
Polarity Source type
Maximum voltage decrease when ON 0.63 V (load current × 1.25Ω)
Maximum leakage current when OFF 40 μA
Output protection function Protection against overheat and overcurrent
Response time The driver delay time is 50 μs (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
Extension module C
Digital output
Number of points 16 points
Common 4 points/common
Rated output voltage 12 VDC to 24 VDC (+20%, −15%)
Rated output current 2 A/pt (4 A/common)
Polarity Source type
Maximum voltage decrease when ON 0.18 V (load current × 0.09Ω)
Maximum leakage current when OFF 0.1mA
Insulation method Photocoupler insulation
Output protection function Protection against overheat, overcurrent, short-circuiting, and
disconnection detection
- 225 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Digital output
Response time The driver delay time is 50 μs (maximum).
In addition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/O module] and
[ladder scan period (depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
Extension module D
Analog input
Number of input channels 4 channels
Analog input range -10 VDC to +10 VDC Voltage input or current input can
(Input resistance: 4.7 MΩ) be selected on a
-20 VDC to +20 mA channel–by–channel basis by
(Input resistance: 250Ω) wiring.
Digital conversion range 12 bits (binary), two's complement representation
Input/output correspondence
Analog input Digital output
+10V +2000
+5V or +20mA +1000
0V or 0mA 0
-5V or -20mA -1000
-10V -2000
Resolution 5 mV or 20 μA
Overall precision Voltage input: ±0.5% (with respect to full scale)
Current input: ±1.0% (with respect to full scale)
Maximum input voltage/current ±15 V/±30 mA
A-D conversion time 2 ms or less
Minimum update period of digital output Ladder scan period of CNC connected
Number of occupied input/output points DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes(NOTE)
CAUTION
This module has four analog input channels but has only one 12-bit digital output
channel within the occupied input points (3 bytes). Namely, a channel for
conversion is selected dynamically using a ladder program. Channel switching DO
points for selecting a channel are present in the occupied output points (2 bytes).
(See Item, “Channel selection and A/D conversion data for extension module D” in
the Subsection 8.6.6.1, “Address map”.)
Extension module E
Analog output
(Note 1)
Number of input channels 4 channels
Analog output range (Note 2) -10 VDC to +10 VDC (external load resistance 10kΩ or more)
0 VDC to +20 mA (external load resistance 400Ω or less)
Digital conversion range 12 bits (binary), two's complement representation
Input/output correspondence
Analog output
Digital input
Voltage output Current output
+2000 +10V -
+1000 +5V +20mA
0 0V 0mA
-1000 -5V -
-2000 -10V -
Resolution 5 mV or 20 μA
Overall precision Voltage input: ±0.5% (with respect to full scale)
Current input: ±1.0% (with respect to full scale)
D-A conversion time (Note 3) 1ms or less
Minimum update period of digital output Ladder scan period of CNC connected
- 226 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Analog output
Number of occupied input/output points (Note 4) DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes(NOTE)
CAUTION
1 One of the four channels must be selected for output using a ladder program.
(See Item, “Channel selection and D/A conversion data for extension module E”
in the Subsection 8.6.6.1, “Address map”.)
2 There is a choice between use for voltage output or use for current output during
connection to the terminal section.
3 The conversion time refers to that only within the module. The actual response
time includes the scan time determined depending on the system.
4 The 3 DI bytes are automatically occupied at assignment, but not used. (See
Item, “Channel selection and D/A conversion data for extension module E” in the
Subsection 8.6.6.1, “Address map”.)
CAUTION
1 The above power supply rating does not include that to be input to DOCOM0
and DOCOM1 for DO output.
2 To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and
JD1B on the basic module, the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required
for the power supply of the basic module.
- 227 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.6.2.6 Weight
Module name Weight (g)
Basic module 420
Extension module A 400
Extension module B 380
Extension module C 440
Extension module D 400
Extension module E 400
φD2
Insulation cover
L L2
φD1
The dimensions indicated below are based on the products of
Weidmuller Color., Ltd.
Cross sec- Inner Outer
Electric wire Length of Inner
tional area JIS VSF UL1007 UL1015 sheath Overall diameter of diam-
JIS IV stripped metallic con-
diameter
of electric KIV 2 length length eter of
wire 2 (mm ) part ductor of sheath
(mm ) (AWG) (AWG) (mm) L1 (mm) sheath
2
(mm ) L2 (mm) D1 (mm) D2 (mm)
D3 (mm)
10 14 8
0.5 - - 20 - 1 2.6 3.1
12 16 10
10 14 8
0.75 0.5 - 18 20 1.2 2.8 3.3
12 16 10
10 14 8
1.0 0.75 0.9 - 18 1.4 3 3.5
12 16 10
CAUTION
Use a ferrule terminal from the viewpoint of long-term reliability.
- 228 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
LINK
ALM
FUSE
LINK
150
ALM
FUSE
- 229 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
T2
CA105
T1
Communication
status display Connector /
LED terminal
Use
board
LINK
number
Alarm status
CP11A 24-VDC power supply input
display LED
ALM CP11B 24-VDC power supply output
S S
JD1A Second I/O link stage
T4 JD1B First I/O link stage
T3 CA105 Extension module connection
JD1A T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green
label
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label
T4 DI terminal board with pink label
CP11A
JD1B
FUSE
CP11B
- 230 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
T1 T2
Connector /
terminal
Use
board
number
JA3 MPG interface
T4
S S CA105 Extension module connection
(to next-stage extension module)
T3 CA106 Extension module connection
JA3 (to previous-stage basic module)
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green
label
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label
T4 DI terminal board with pink label
Rotary switch
Connector /
T2 terminal
T1 Use
board
number
CA105 Extension module connection
(to next-stage extension module)
CA106 Extension module connection
(to previous-stage basic module)
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T4 T2 DO terminal board with lime green
S S
label
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label
T4 DI terminal board with pink label
T3
Rotary switch
CAUTION
Be sure to connect extension module A next to the basic module.
- 231 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
T1
Connector /
terminal
Use
board
number
CA105 Extension module connection
(to next-stage expansion module)
CA106 Extension module connection
(to previous-stage basic or extension
module)
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green label
T2
Rotary switch
T1
Connector /
terminal
Use
board
number
CA105 Extension module connection
(to next-stage expansion module)
CA106 Extension module connection
(to previous-stage basic or extension
module)
T1 Analog input CH1 and CH2 terminal board
T2 with yellow label
T2 Analog input CH3 and CH4 terminal board
with pink label
Rotary switch
- 232 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Connector /
terminal
Use
board
number
CA105 Extension module connection
(to next-stage expansion module)
T2 CA106 Extension module connection
(to previous-stage basic or extension
module)
T1 Analog input CH1 and CH2 terminal board
with lime green label
T2 Analog input CH3 and CH4 terminal board
with sky blue label
Rotary switch
8.6.4 Installation
Mounting holes for screwing
Front view of the module Unit: mm
2-M4
- 233 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
DIN rail
Locking section
1) Place the hook of the module onto the top of the DIN rail.
2) Push the module until it clicks into place.
CAUTION
Ensure that the locking section is not left lowered.
2) Method of dismounting
DIN rail
CAUTION
When dismounting the module, be careful not to damage the locking section by
applying an excessive force.
- 234 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
8.6.5 Connection
I/O Link
JD51A JD1B JD1A
T1
24 VDC power supply Relay, etc.
Terminal block
CP11A
16 DO points
T2
Basic module Relay, etc.
External device CP11B Switch, etc.
T3
24 DI
points
CA105
T4
Inter-module Switch, etc.
cable A
Power supply for load
Manual pulse Extension module A
JA3
T1
generator With manual pulse Relay, etc.
Terminal block
generator 16 DO points
T2
Relay, etc.
Inter-module cable 16 DO points
T2
Switch, etc.
CA105 24 DI
Switch, etc. points
CAUTION
Extension module C does not have DI points. Only the terminal blocks for DO,
T1 and T2, are available.
With extension module D, only the terminal blocks for analog input, T1 and T2,
are available. With extension module E, only the terminal blocks for analog
output, T1 and T2, are available.
- 235 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Key arrangement
Recommended cable (for using external power): A02B-0124-K830
(5 m long, with an M3 terminal on the 24 V power supply side)
The 24 VDC input to CP11A (A1, A2) can be output from CP11B (B1, B2) for branching. CP11B (B1,
B2) is connected as shown below. In this case, the external 24 VDC power supply needs to provide
CP11A (A1, A2) with a current which is equal to the sum of the current consumed by the control unit and
the current used via CP11B (B1, B2).
Basic module
CP11A
For input
A3 A2 A1 External device
0V
Connected for branching
B3 B2 B1
0V
CP11B
For branching Tyco Electronics AMP
Make a selection matching
2-178288-3 (housing)
the external device.
1-175218-5 (contact)
Key arrangement
CAUTION
1 Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the CNC is
turned on, and that +24 V is removed either when or after the power to the CNC
is turned off.
2 When turning off the power to the CNC control unit, be sure to turn off the power
to the terminal type I/O module and other slave I/O units connected via the I/O
Link as well.
- 236 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
CAUTION
The terminal blocks on the cable side are shipped with the terminal type I/O
module.
- 237 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Extension module C
- Assignment of signals for output
T1 (Label color: Light blue) Label indication T2 (Label color: Yellow green) Label indication
1 DOCOM0 V 1 DOCOM2 V
2 Yn+0.0 0 2 Yn+1.0 0
3 0V-0 G 3 0V-2 G
4 Yn+0.1 1 4 Yn+1.1 1
5 Yn+0.2 2 5 Yn+1.2 2
6 0V-0 G 6 0V-2 G
7 Yn+0.3 3 7 Yn+1.3 3
8 DOCOM1 V 8
9 Yn+0.4 4 9 DOCOM3 V
10 0V-1 G 10 Yn+1.4 4
11 Yn+0.5 5 11 0V-3 G
12 Yn+0.6 6 12 Yn+1.5 5
13 0V-1 G 13 Yn+1.6 6
14 Yn+0.7 7 14 0V-3 G
15 Yn+1.7 7
Extension module D
- Assignment of signals for analog input
T1 (Label color: Yellow) Label indication T2 (Label color: Pink) Label indication
1 JMP0 J 1 JMP2 J
2 INP0 + 2 INP2 +
3 INM0 - 3 INM2 -
4 COM0 C 4 COM2 C
5 FG0I F 5 FG2I F
6 FG0O F 6 FG2O F
7 7
8 JMP1 J 8 JMP3 J
9 INP1 + 9 INP3 +
10 INM1 - 10 INM3 -
11 COM1 C 11 COM3 C
12 FG1I F 12 FG3I F
13 FG1O F 13 FG3O F
14 14
15
CAUTION
The terminal blocks on the cable side are shipped with the terminal type I/O
module.
- 238 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Extension module E
- Assignment of signals for analog output
T1 (Label color: Yellow green) Label indication T2 (Label color: Light blue) Label indication
1 VP1 A 1 VP3 A
2 VN1 B 2 VN3 B
3 3
4 IP1 C 4 IP3 C
5 IN1 D 5 IN3 D
6 6
7 7
8 VP2 E 8 VP4 E
9 VN2 F 9 VN4 F
10 10
11 IP2 G 11 IP4 G
12 IN2 H 12 IN4 H
13 13
14 14
15
CAUTION
The terminal blocks on the cable side are shipped with the terminal type I/O
module.
- 239 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
C ○T3-11 DICOM1
C ○T4-1 DICOM1
C ○T4-6 DICOM1 I :入力回路
C ○T4-11 DICOM1
I1 LE
0 ○T3-7 Xm+1.0
1 ○T4-7 Xm+1.1 I1 レシーバ
2 ○T3-8 Xm+1.2 I1 入力端子
3 ○T4-8 Xm+1.3 I1
4 ○T3-9 Xm+1.4 I1 I1 Input circuit 1
5 ○T4-9 Xm+1.5 I1
6 ○T3-10 Xm+1.6 I1 LED
7 ○T4-10 Xm+1.7 I1 0V
Receiver
Input pin
Switch, etc. 0 ○T3-12 Xm+2.0 I1
1 ○T4-12 Xm+2.1 I1
2 ○T3-13 Xm+2.2 I1
3 ○T4-13 Xm+2.3 I1
4 ○T3-14 Xm+2.4 I1 0V
5 ○T4-14 Xm+2.5 I1
6 ○T3-15 Xm+2.6 I1
7 ○T4-15 Xm+2.7 I1
CAUTION
The circuitry enclosed in the dashed rectangle shown above is mounted on the
basic module only. In the case of an extension module, 24 V for DICOM1 is
supplied via the extension cable from the basic module or the extension module at
the preceding stage.
- 240 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
CAUTION
As listed in the table below, Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI terminals for which a
common voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting DICOM0 (T3-1 and T3-6
pins) to +24 V, a DI signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however,
a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI
signal. From the safety viewpoint, the connection of DICOM0 (T3-1 and T3-6
pins) to 0 V is recommended wherever possible.
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed
(from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the input is “0”. For the
unconnected terminals at the addresses for which a common voltage can be
selected (from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7), the input is “0” when DICOM0 (T3-1 and T3-6
pins) is connected to 0 V or “1” when it is connected to +24. Connect DICOM0
when used. When addresses from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 are not used, connect
DICOM0 to the 0 V power supply.
Common voltage for the basic module, and extension modules A and B
Address Common voltage
Xm Can externally be selected with DICOM0.
Xm+1 Cannot be selected.
Xm+2 Cannot be selected.
- 241 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
DO connection
Indication on terminal Inside module
block label Terminal block and pin No. Terminal name
V ○T1-1 DOCOM0
V ○T2-1 DOCOM0
+ L 0 ○T1-2 Yn+0.0 O
L 1 ○T2-2 Yn+0.1 O
Regulated power
L 2 ○T1-4 Yn+0.2 O
supply for load
L 3 ○T2-4 Yn+0.3 O
- L 4 ○T1-5 Yn+0.4 O Address number
L 5 ○T2-5 Yn+0.5 O Bit number
L 6 ○T1-7 Yn+0.6 O
L 7 ○T2-7 Yn+0.7 O
G ○T1-3 0V
G ○T2-3 0V
G ○T1-6 0V
○T2-6 0V 0V
G
V ○T1-8 DOCOM1
V ○T2-8 DOCOM1
L 0 ○T1-9 Yn+1.0 O
+ O : Output circuit
L 1 ○T2-9 Yn+1.1 O
Regulated power DOCOM0
L 2 ○T1-11 Yn+1.2 O
supply for load or
L 3 ○T2-11 Yn+1.3 O
- 4 ○T1-12 O DOCOM1
L Yn+1.4 Internal
L 5 ○T2-12 Yn+1.5 O Output pin circuit
L 6 ○T1-14 Yn+1.6 O
LED
L 7 ○T2-14 Yn+1.7 O
G ○T1-10 0V
G ○T2-10 0V 0V
G ○T1-13 0V
L : Load G ○T2-13 0V 0V
CAUTION
Be sure to connect the 0 V signal from the regulated power supply for load to the 0
V terminal (with label indication "G") of the module. Otherwise, a load error can
occur.
- 242 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Extension module C
Inside module
Indication on
terminal block label
V ○T1-1 DOCOM0
+ L 0 ○T1-2 Yn+0.0 O
V ○T1-8 DOCOM1
+ L 4 ○T1-9 Yn+0.4 O
- L 7 ○T1-14 Yn+0.7 O
G ○T1-10 0V-1
G ○T1-13 0V-1
V ○T2-1 DOCOM2
+ L 0 ○T2-2 Yn+1.0 O
7 ○T2-15 O LED
- L Yn+1.7
G ○T2-11 0V-3
0V-n
G ○T2-14 0V-3
n:0-3
L : Load
CAUTION
Be sure to connect the 0 V signal from the regulated power supply for load to the 0
V terminal (with label indication "G") of the module. Otherwise, a load error can
occur.
- 243 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Extension module D
In the example of connection below, CH1 is used for voltage input, CH3 is used for current input, and
CH2 and CH4 are not used.
Label indication Inside module
Terminal 250Ω
Terminal block No. name
For voltage input CH1 J ○T1-1 JMP0
CAUTION
1 When JMPn and INPn (n=0, 1, 2, 3) are connected with each other, the channel
becomes a current input channel.
2 For the connection cable, use a shielded twisted pair.
3 In the figure above, the shield is connected to FGnI for grounding to FGnO.
However, the shield may be directly connected to frame ground by using a cable
clamp without using FGnI and FGnO.
- 244 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
CAUTION
4 When a voltage source (current source) has a GND terminal as shown above,
connect COMn to the terminal. When no GND terminal is provided, connect
INMn and COMn with each other on the analog input module as indicated by the
dotted line. COMn of each channel is connected to the common analog ground
inside the module.
- 245 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Extension module E
In the example of connection below, CH1 is used for voltage input, CH3 is used for current input, and
CH2 and CH4 are not used.
Terminal Label indication
Terminal
name block No.
CH1 For voltage output Load
VP1-○TNB1-1 A
10kΩ or
DA more
converter VN1-○TNB1-2 B
IP1-○TNB1-4 C
IN1-○TNB1-5 D
CH2 VP2-○TNB1-8 E
DA
converter VN2-○TNB1-9 F
IP3-○TNB1-11 G
IN3-○TNB1-12 H
CH3 VP3-○TNB2-1 A
DA
converter VN3-○TNB2-2 B
Load
For current output
IP3-○TNB2-4 C 400Ω or less
IN3-○TNB2-5 D
CH4 VP4-○TNB2-8 E
DA
converter VN4-○TNB2-9 F
IP4-○TNB2-11 G
IN4-○TNB2-12 H
CAUTION
1 For connection, use a shielded two-core twisted pair.
2 Ground the shield of the cable on the load side.
3 When another unit requiring a power supply is connected to this module, turn the
power to the basic module on first. If the power to the unit connected to this
module is turned on first, invalid output or malfunction may cause an accident.
- 246 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
- 247 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Recommended screwdriver
Weidmuller
Product number: SDI 0.4X2.5X80
CAUTION
Do not pry the screwdriver in a clamp. Otherwise, the terminal block can be
damaged.
- 248 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Terminal block
Mounting screw
- 249 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.6.6 Settings
Xm2 Yn2
Extension module 1 Slot 2
Xm2 + 1 Extension module 1 Slot 2 Yn2 + 1
Xm2 + 2
Xm3 Yn3
Extension module 2 Slot 3
Xm3 + 1 Extension module 2 Slot 3 Yn3 + 1
Xm3 + 2
Xm4 Yn4
Extension module 3 Slot 4
Xm4 + 1 Extension module 3 Slot 4 Yn4 + 1
Xm4 + 2
Xm1, Xm2, Xm3, Xm4, Xmmpg, Yn1, Yn2, Yn3, and Yn4 indicate the start address at allocation.
Each module is treated as a slot and addresses are allocated for each module. When only the basic module
is used, allocate 3-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO addresses to slot 1. When extension modules are
added, allocate 3-byte DI addresses and 2-byte DO addresses to slots 2, 3, and 4.
An I/O module for connector panel has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual
pulse generators, allocate addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three
manual pulse generators at a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators).
Do not use the DI space with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.
CAUTION
Extension modules C (2A output module) and E (analog output module) have no
DI signals. For connection to the I/O Link i, it is not necessary to allocate
addresses to the DI section of extension modules C and E.
- 250 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Xm Yn
Basic module Basic module
Xm+1 Yn+1
Xm+2 Yn+2 Extension
Xm+3 Extension Yn+3 module 1
Xm+4 module 1 Yn+4 Extension
Xm+5 Yn+5 module 2
Xm+6 Extension Yn+6 Extension
Xm+7 module 2 Yn+7 module 3
Xm+8
Xm+9 Extension
Xm+10 module 3
Xm+11
Xm+12(for 1st MPG) Extension
Xm+13(for 2nd MPG) module 1
Xm+14(for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15(DO alarm Basic module
detection)
For connection to the I/O Link, allocate addresses to the basic module and extension modules at a time.
Addresses Xm+12 to Xm+14 are allocated to manual pulse generator and address Xm+15 is allocated to
the DO alarm regardless of whether an extension module is used. For this reason, allocate DI addresses in
units of 16 bytes.
Do not use the DI space with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals
directly.
CAUTION
DO alarms of extension module C (2A output module) are allocated not to
Xm+15, but to the DI addresses for extension module 1, 2, or 3. For details, see
“Extension module C” in Subsection 8.6.6.2.
By setting the values listed below to CHA and CHB, the corresponding channel is selected, and the A/D
conversion data of the channel and the data of the selected channel are written in the DI area. The
character X above represents an unused bit, so either 1 or 0 may be written in place of X.
CHB CHA Channel selected
0 0 Channel 1
0 1 Channel 2
1 0 Channel 3
1 1 Channel 4
- 251 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
<Address>
A/D conversion data of the channel selected by the above setting is output to two bytes of the three bytes
of DI (input signals) of the slot to which this module is allocated. The A/D conversion data output
addresses are as shown below, depending on where extension module D (analog input module) is installed.
• When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 1 (slot 2)
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm2(odd-numbered address) Undefined
Xm2+1(even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm2+2(odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08
Xm2 is the start address of slot 2.
• When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 2 (slot 3)
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm3(even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm3+1(odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08
Xm3+2(even-numbered address) Undefined
Xm3 is the start address of slot 3.
• When extension module D (analog input module) is installed in extension module 3 (slot 4)
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm4(odd-numbered address) Undefined
Xm4+1(even-numbered address) D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 D00
Xm4+2(odd-numbered address) 0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08
Xm4 is the start address of slot 4.
- 252 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
D00 to D11 represent 12-bit digital output data (complement representation). D00 corresponds to
weighting of 20 and D11 corresponds to that of -211. That is, D11 is a sign bit represented as a two’s
complement.
CHA and CHB represent the channel of which data is converted. This means that when the two bytes
above are read with a ladder program, the A-D converted data of the input channel represented by CHA
and CHB can be read from D11 to D00.
CAUTION
When two-byte digital output addresses are to be referenced with a ladder
program, a read must always be performed word-by-word (16 bits).
By setting the values listed below to CHA and CHB, the corresponding channel is selected.
CHB CHA Channel selected
0 0 Channel 1
0 1 Channel 2
1 0 Channel 3
1 1 Channel 4
- 253 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
CAUTION
For connection to the I/O Link, when an analog output module is used as an
extension module in the configuration, be sure to allocate the start address of Y
(DO) of the basic module at an even-numbered address.
CAUTION
1 Be sure to write the target data for D-A conversion with a PMC program
word-by-word (16 bits).
2 The output value of each channel is held until another data is written in that
channel.
3 Multiple channels cannot be selected within the same ladder scan period.
After selecting a channel, wait at least the ladder scan period before selecting
another channel.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Address of the DO driver which
Slot number Alarm information number Location
detects an error
1 0 Yn1 Basic module
1 1 Yn1+1 Basic module
2 0 Yn2 Extension module 1
2 1 Yn2+1 Extension module 1
3 0 Yn3 Extension module 2
3 1 Yn3+1 Extension module 2
- 254 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
CAUTION
For operation to be performed when a DO error occurs in extension module C and
the protection circuit is activated, see “States when the protection function is
activated in extension module C”.
Extension module C
With extension module C, a DO error such as a ground fault is detected for each signal. The DO error is
input not in the area at Xm+15, but in the area at the DI address listed in the table below.
• DO alarm bit addresses when extension module C is allocated as extension modules 1 to 3 (0: No DO
alarm issued, 1: DO alarm issued). *=Don’t care
Bit
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module
Xm+3 Bit 7 of Bit 6 of Bit 5 of Bit 4 of Bit 3 of Bit 2 of Bit 1 of Bit 0 of
Yn+2 Yn+2 Yn+2 Yn+2 Yn+2 Yn+2 Yn+2 Yn+2 DO alarm on
Xm+4 Bit 7 of Bit 6 of Bit 5 of Bit 4 of Bit 3 of Bit 2 of Bit 1 of Bit 0 of extension
Yn+3 Yn+3 Yn+3 Yn+3 Yn+3 Yn+3 Yn+3 Yn+3 module 1
Xm+5 * * * * * * * *
Xm+6 Bit 7 of Bit 6 of Bit 5 of Bit 4 of Bit 3 of Bit 2 of Bit 1 of Bit 0 of
Yn+4 Yn+4 Yn+4 Yn+4 Yn+4 Yn+4 Yn+4 Yn+4 DO alarm on
Xm+7 Bit 7 of Bit 6 of Bit 5 of Bit 4 of Bit 3 of Bit 2 of Bit 1 of Bit 0 of extension
Yn+5 Yn+5 Yn+5 Yn+5 Yn+5 Yn+5 Yn+5 Yn+5 module 2
Xm+8 * * * * * * * *
Xm+9 Bit 7 of Bit 6 of Bit 5 of Bit 4 of Bit 3 of Bit 2 of Bit 1 of Bit 0 of
Yn+6 Yn+6 Yn+6 Yn+6 Yn+6 Yn+6 Yn+6 Yn+6 DO alarm on
Xm+10 Bit 7 of Bit 6 of Bit 5 of Bit 4 of Bit 3 of Bit 2 of Bit 1 of Bit 0 of extension
Yn+7 Yn+7 Yn+7 Yn+7 Yn+7 Yn+7 Yn+7 Yn+7 module 3
Xm+11 * * * * * * * *
- 255 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
CAUTION
1 Xm+5, Xm+8, and Xm+11 cannot be used with extension module C.
2 Even when extension module A or B is allocated as extension module 1 or 2,
address space is not shifted.
CAUTION
1 If the overheat protection function or over voltage protection function among the
protection functions above is activated, the DO bit is kept OFF until the cause is
eliminated. When the cause is eliminated, the DO bit is set to ON without
restarting the system.
2 Disconnection detection is performed by monitoring, with an output element in the
module, the current flowing through a load when DO output is ON. When the
detected current value is about 100 mA or less, disconnection detection is
assumed. So, when a device (such as an LED) with a small load current is
connected, the DO alarm state results, assuming disconnection detection. Unlike
the other protection functions, however, this function does not turn off DO output.
If a connection is reactivated after the state of disconnection is once set,
disconnection detection is canceled without restarting the system.
By changing the setting (rotary switch) for the extension modules, connections can be made by omitting
some extension modules (slots). Use the same setting method as for I/O modules for connector panel. For
details, see Subsection 8.2.11.
- 256 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Standard setting
8.6.7 Others
8.6.7.1 Method of common pin expansion
Additional common pins can be provided by mounting (screwing) a commercially available terminal block
on the top cover of an extension module.
Commercial
terminal block
- 257 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Unit: mm
CAUTION
To fasten a terminal block, use M3 tap screws not longer than 10 mm.
Load
- 258 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
CAUTION
1 Be sure to connect the bit at the same address for parallel connection. Three or
more signals cannot be connected in parallel.
2 Extension module C does not allow parallel DO connection.
- 259 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.7.1 Overview
The FANUC I/O Link connection unit is provided to connect FANUC I/O Link masters such as CNCs
with the I/O Link for DI/DO signal transfer.
System A System B
FANUC I/O
FANUC I/OLink
Link
connection unit
Œ‹・‡ƒ†ƒjƒbƒg
DI DO
DO DI
Fig. 8.7.1 System which uses FANUC I/O Link connection units
This unit enables I/O data transfer between two independent I/O Link masters. When the system is
adjusted or maintained, this unit also allows one I/O Link to operate with the power to the line system of
the other I/O Link off, that is, with link operation stopped.
NOTE
1 If the power to the system is turned off for maintenance or adjustment or link
operation is stopped due to a failure in the host CNC or a slave unit for either of
the FANUC I/O Link lines, this connection unit is designed so that it sets DI data
sent from the stopped system to all “0” and transfers it.
2 While the two I/O Link lines are communicating with each other normally, if the
link operation of either line stops or is stopped, it takes several tens to hundreds
of milliseconds for the function in 1 to take effect. During this period, that data
which exists immediately before the line stops is transferred.
3 It cannot be guaranteed that the operations described in 1 and 2 are carried out
that way. Therefore, manage the signals related to safety by making a safety
circuit outside of the I/O Link connection unit.
- 260 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
8.7.2 Specification
Item Specification
I/O Link function Provided with two slave mode I/O Link interface channels, between which DI/DO data can be
transferred.
[Interface types]
Electrical - optical
Electrical - electrical One of the following combinations is selected:
Optical - optical
Number of DI/DO data DI: Up to 256, DO: Up to 256
items (The number of data items actually used varies depending on the amount of data
assigned in the host.)
Power supply Each I/O Link interface must be independently supplied with +24 VDC.
Voltage: +24 VDC ±10%
Current: 0.2 A (excluding surge)
If a master unit does not have sufficient capacity to supply power to each unit (0.2 A per
slot), use an external power supply unit. The power supply must be switched on,
either simultaneously with or before, the I/O Link master.
The two systems can be switched on and off independently of each other. Data from
a system to which no power is supplied appears as zeros when viewed from the other
system. The data becomes 0 within 200 ms of the power being switched off.
External dimensions 180 mm (width) × 150 mm (height) × about 50 mm (depth)
W H D
Fig. 8.7.2 (b) is an outline drawing of the unit.
Installation The unit, which is a stand-alone type, is installed in the power magnetics cabinet. Fig.
8.7.2 (c) shows how to mount the unit.
Operating environment Temperature : 0 to 60°C
Humidity : 5 to 75% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration : 0.5 G or less
Ordering information
Interface type Specification
Electrical-optical interface A20B-2000-0410
Electrical-electrical interface A20B-2000-0411
Optical-optical interface A20B-2000-0412
- 261 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
LED indications
LED5 LED3 LED4 LED2
(GREEN) (RED) (GREEN) (RED)
DC-DC
CONVERTER
CP2 CP1
+5V
LED1 (RED)
0V : Check pin
- 262 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
180 Unit: mm
10 160 10
30
Printed-circuit board
90
150
30
Cable Cable
Mounted components
50 or less
Fig. 8.7.2(b) Outline drawing
- 263 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.7.3 Connection
Optical I/O
Link adapter
CP* CP*
②
Electrical Optical
interface interface
JD1B* COPB*
JD1A* COPA*
① ②
FANUC I/O Link connection unit (for
electrical-optical interface)
(*) 1 or 2 (channel No.)
- 264 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
(4) Power supply cable
CP1/CP2 connectors
1 2 3
Y +24V 0V (Input)
X +24V 0V (Output)
• 24 VDC is supplied via a Y-connector. Provided the power supply has sufficient capacity,
power can be supplied to another device with the X-side as output.
• Power must be supplied to both CP1 and CP2.
• Cable-side connector specification
Y-connector: A63L-0001-0460#3LKY (Tyco Electronics, 2-178288-3)
X-connector: A63L-0001-0460#3LKX (Tyco Electronics, 1-178288-3)
Contact: A63L-0001-0456#BS (Tyco Electronics, 175218-5)
Ordering information: Y + 3 contacts: A02B-0120-K323
X + 3 contacts: A02B-0120-K324
Cable material: Vinyl-insulated electrical wire AWG20-16
Cable length: Determine the length of the cable such that the supplied voltage at the
receiving end satisfies the requirements, because the voltage may
fluctuate and drop as a result of the resistance of the cable conductor.
(5) Frame grounding
Ground the frame of the unit using a wire having a cross section of at least 5.5 m2. An M4 frame
ground terminal is provided.
- 265 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.8.1 Overview
The standard machine operator’s panel for the 30i series consists of the following operator’s panels.
• Main panel
The main panel is a machine operator’s panel connected with the 30i series by the I/O Link i or I/O
Link with independent key switches all of which key tops are detachable.
• Sub panel A, D
Sub panels A and D are operator’s panels with power ON/OFF, emergency stop, program protect,
and two override rotary switches to enable the signal from each switch to be transferred to the power
magnetics cabinet via the main panel.
- 266 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
- 267 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
CNK2
CNK1
MDI (CA55)
Main panel
CM68
I/O Link (JD51A)
General-purpose DI/DO
JD1B
CM69
JD1A
JA3 Manual pulse generator
CM65 (SA1)
CM66 (SA2)
NOTE
Manual pulse generators cannot be connected to JA3 and JA58 simultaneously.
- 268 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
For the main panel, allocate 12-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 8-byte DO addresses to slot 1. The main
panel has an interface for three manual pulse generators. To use manual pulse generators, allocate
addresses to slot MPG. With this setting, addresses can be allocated to the three manual pulse generators at
a time (addresses cannot be allocated individually to manual pulse generators). Do not use the addresses
with the ladder because the CNC processes the manual pulse generator signals directly.
Xm Yn
Xm+1 Yn+1
General purpose
Xm+2 input signal Yn+2 Matrix output
Xm+3 Yn+3 signal
(key LED)
Xm+4 Yn+4
Including
Xm+5 Yn+5 general-purpose
Xm+6 Matrix input signal Yn+6 DO
Xm+7 (key switch) Yn+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Manual pulse
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG) generator
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 Unavailable
For the main panel, allocate 16-byte DI addresses as one group and 8-byte DO addresses as one group.
Do not use addresses Xm+12 to Xm+14 in the above table with the ladder because the CNC processes the
manual pulse generator signals directly.
- 269 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Input/output Pins shaded by are in pairs. Only one in each pair is usable.
Pins shaded by are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the same name
are connected directly to one another.
- 270 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
(for manual pulse generator) (for pendant type manual pulse generator)
CA64(IN)
01 +24V
24VDC power supply 02 0V
03
CA64(OUT)
24VDC power supply 01 +24V
02 0V
03
NOTE
Both connectors CA64(IN) and CA64(OUT) are same specification. And there is
not indication of (IN) and (OUT) on the PCB.
- 271 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
*ESP *ESP
A04 A03 *ESP
(2a2b)
ESPCM1 ESPCM1
B04 B03 +24V
EON
A01 A01 EON
Only for sub
panel D
COM1
A02 A02 COM
OFF switch (SB3)
EOFF
B01 B01 EOFF
COM2
B02 B02
- 272 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
1 Connection of Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.4 shows when the Sub panel
A/D is used.
2 When sub panel A or D is used, the cables to the rotary switches and wiring to the
memory protect switch are contained in the sub panel.
- 273 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
3 JA58 DI signals can be used as a signal for axis selection or multiplier setting
when a pendant type manual pulse generator is connected. Do not connect any DI
signal used for axis selection or multiplier setting to CM68.
CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CM68 (A1), CM69 (A1), CM65 (A04), CM66
(A04), JA58 (10), and JA58 (19) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these
pins from the outside.
NOTE
1 JA58 DI signals can be used as a signal for axis selection or multiplier setting
when a pendant type manual pulse generator is connected. Do not connect any DI
signal used for axis selection or multiplier setting to CM68.
- 274 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
2 Xm+3.0 to 3.7 have a common line that is possible to select the source/sink type.
If DICOM (CM69-B06pin) is connected to +24V, the DI signal logic is negative. But
in this connection, if the DI signal wires happen to drop the ground level, the status
of the DI signal is same as the DI signal is "ON". From the safety viewpoint,
DICOM should be connected 0V.
3 From the safety viewpoint, Emergency Stop signal must be assigned on the
address Xm+0.0 to 0.7 or Xm+1.0 to 1.7 or Xm+2.0 to 2.7. As refer to the
Subsection 8.8.3, assign the Emergency stop DI.
4 For the unconnected pins at addresses fro which the common voltage is fixed
(from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7, and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7),
the input is “0”. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common
voltage can be selected (from Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7), the input is “0” when the
DICOM (CM69 (B06) pin) is connected to 0 V or “1” when it is connected to +24 V.
Connect DICOM (CM69 (B06) pin) when used. When addresses from Xm+3.0 to
Xm+3.7 are not used, connect DICOM to 0 V.
- 275 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Yn+5.3 can be used when a pendant type manual pulse generator is connected to
JA58. In this case, however, do not connect Yn+5.3 to CM68.
Axis Multiplier
selection setting
NOTE
1 When Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector JA58 are allocated as the DIs used for the
axis selection and multiplier setting, Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector CM68 cannot
be used.
2 One DO is available for the manual pulse generator side at the user's direction.
When this is used, Yn+5.3 of CM68 cannot be used, as in the case for DIs above.
- 276 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Keyswitches
Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
- 277 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Xm+0.5 and Xm+1.2 are parity bits.
- 278 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
8.8.9 Outline
NOTE
Install the main panel in a vertical direction.
- 279 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Ground stud
(M4×10) Mass: 0.7kg
Unit: mm
Panel-cut drawing
- 280 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Ground stud
(M4×10)
Mass: 1.0kg
Unit: mm
Panel-cut drawing
- 281 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Ground stud
Fuse (1A) (M4×10)
Ground
terminal
(M3
screw)
Unit: mm
- 282 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
The above power supply rating does not include that to be input to DOCOM for
DO output.
- 283 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
EDIT EDIT mode selection signal; Sets program edit operation mode.
REF Reference position return mode selection; Sets reference position return
RETURN mode.
INC
Step feed mode selection; Sets step feed mode.
JOG
HANDLE Manual handle feed mode selection; Sets manual handle feed mode.
Teach-in jog (reach-in handle) mode selection signal; Sets teach-in jog
TEACH
(teach-in handle) mode.
SINGLE Single block signal; Executes program one by one. This key is used to check
BLOCK a program.
- 284 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Manual feed axis selection; Axes are selected, when these buttons are set to
on in the jog feed mode or step feed mode.
Manual feed operation; Performs movement along selected axes when these
buttons are set on in the jog feed mode or step feed mode.
RAPID Traverse; Performs jog feed at rapid traverse rate when this button is set to on.
SPDL Positive spindle rotation direction; Rotates the spindle motor in the positive
CW direction.
SPDL Negative spindle rotation direction; Rotates the spindle motor in the negative
CCW direction.
SPDL
Spindle stop; Stops the spindle motor rotation.
STOP
- 285 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Use the oil-proof sheet in the environment which oil is used for.
When the above protection function is activated by the DO driver, the relevant error is output as a status
alarm and transferred to the PMC system relay area. The following table lists system relay area
information and corresponding DO data related to a status alarm. When an alarm data bit is set to “1”, the
DO driver corresponding to the bit detects an error. For details of the status alarm, see Subsection 7.3.3,
“Status Alarm”.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Information output to the system relay area Address of the DO driver which
Slot number Alarm information number detects an error
1 0 Yn1 error
1 1 Yn1+1 error
1 2 Yn1+2 error
1 3 Yn1+3 error
1 4 Yn1+4 error
1 5 Yn1+5 error
1 6 Yn1+6 error
1 7 Yn1+7 error
NOTE
When the main panel is connected on the I/O Link, the output protection function
is activated, but no alarm can be detected.
- 286 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
8.9.1 Overview
The FANUC I/O Link-AS-i converter unit (hereinafter referred to as the AS-i converter) is a stand-alone
unit that converts I/O Link data to the Actuator Sensor Interface (hereinafter referred to as the AS-i),
which is an I/O-level open network.
CAUTION
The AS-i converter is a unit dedicated to I/O Link connection. It cannot be used
for I/O Link i connection.
8.9.1.1 Features
The AS-i converter converts the AS-i to the I/O Link so that the DI/DO signals of an AS-i slave module
can be used by the PMC of a CNC that has the I/O Link.
CNC
I/O LINK
I/O Unit
- 287 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Note that when the AS-i converter is used, a large number of I/O points are
occupied on the I/O Link side as described in Subsection 8.9.4.
8.9.2 Specifications
Weight
For Ver. 2.0 For Ver. 2.1
A03B-0817-C001 A03B-0817-C002
350g 370g
- 288 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
AS-i
terminal
block
8.9.2.4 Installation
Mounting hole for screwing
NOTE
1 A screwdriver is inserted on a slant to mount and dismount the unit, so that a
sufficient maintenance space is required on both sides of the unit. When the
front face of an adjacent unit is flush with the front face of the unit or is recessed,
provide a clearance of about 20 mm from the adjacent unit. When the front face
of an adjacent unit is more projected toward you than the front face of the unit,
provide a clearance of about 70 mm from the adjacent unit.
2 When the unit is to be installed near a side plane of the cabinet, provide a
clearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the side plane of the cabinet.
- 289 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Unit: mm
- 290 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
DIN rail
1. Place the hook of the unit onto the top of the DIN rail.
2. Push the unit until it clicks into place.
Method of dismounting
DIN rail
NOTE
When dismounting the unit, be careful not to damage the locking section by
applying an excessive force. When mounting and dismounting the unit, hold the
unit by its top and bottom surfaces. Avoid applying force to the sides (where slits
are provided).
- 291 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.9.3 Connection
CNC
AS-i converter
CP1
For branch output
24 VDC power supply
B1 B2 B3
Connected for input Regulated
+24E 0V
power supply
A1 A2 A3 24 VDC ±10%
+24 0V
For input
Tyco Electronics AMP Make a selection matching
1-178288-3 (housing) the power supply used.
1-175218-5 (contact)
Key arrangement
A02B-0124-K830
The 24 VDC input to CP1 (A1, A2) can be output from CP1 (B1, B2) for branching. CP1 (B1, B2) is
connected as shown below. In this case, the external 24 VDC power supply needs to provide CP1 (A1,
A2) with a current which is equal to the sum of the current consumed by the control unit and the current
used via CP1 (B1, B2).
- 292 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
AS-i converter
CP1
For branch output External device
A1 A2 A3
+24 0V
Tyco Electronics AMP Make a selection
For input 2-178288-3 (housing) matching the external
1-175218-5 (contact) device.
Key arrangement
NOTE
1 Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the CNC is
turned on, and that +24 V is removed either when or after the power to the CNC
is turned off.
2 When turning off the power to the CNC control unit, be sure to turn off the power
to the AS-i converter and other slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link as well.
3 Turn on the power to the AS-i power supply (power supply connected to the AS-i
communication cable) either when or before the power to the CNC control unit is
turned on. If the power to the AS-i power supply is turned on after the power to the
CNC control unit is turned on, the system may not be started.
+: Brown
- 293 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
1) Peel off the coating of the AS-i cable then screw the cable onto the terminal block of the AS-i
converter.
2) This terminal block is detachable, and work can be done on the terminal block after being detached
from the AS-i converter. When attaching the terminal block, firmly tighten the screws for mounting
the terminal block.
3) To facilitate AS-i cable branching, two AS-i + terminals and two AS-i − terminals are provided. A +
terminal and a − terminal are connected with each other in the AS-i converter. Use those terminals
that can be handled more easily.
4) Do not connect two cables to each terminal.
5) Connect the GND terminal to ground.
NOTE
To protect against induction noise, separate high-voltage lines and the power line
from the AS-i communication cable as much as possible. (It is recommended to
separate high-voltage lines and the power line from the AS-i communication cable
by 300 mm or more.) Moreover, attach a surge absorber to a device that tends to
generate noise.
- 294 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
A number after # represents an AS-i slave number.
- 295 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
A number and letter after # represent an AS-i slave number.
- 296 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
<Output>
Group α Group α+1
Y bit 7-4 bit 3-0 Y' bit 7-4 bit 3-0
+0 DO #1A Reserved +0 DO #1B Reserved
+1 DO #3A DO #2A +1 DO #3B DO #2B
+2 DO #5A DO #4A +2 DO #5B DO #4B
+3 DO #7A DO #6A +3 DO #7B DO #6B
+4 DO #9A DO #8A +4 DO #9B DO #8B
+5 DO #11A DO #10A +5 DO #11B DO #10B
+6 DO #13A DO #12A +6 DO #13B DO #12B
+7 DO #15A DO #14A +7 DO #15B DO #14B
+8 DO #17A DO #16A +8 DO #17B DO #16B
+9 DO #19A DO #18A +9 DO #19B DO #18B
+10 DO #21A DO #20A +10 DO #21B DO #20B
+11 DO #23A DO #22A +11 DO #23B DO #22B
+12 DO #25A DO #24A +12 DO #25B DO #24B
+13 DO #27A DO #26A +13 DO #27B DO #26B
+14 DO #29A DO #28A +14 DO #29B DO #28B
+15 DO #31A DO #30A +15 DO #31B DO #30B
+16 Command flag +16 Reserved
+17 Command code +17 Reserved
+18 Command parameter (1) +18 Command parameter (6)
+19 Command parameter (2) +19 Command parameter (7)
+20 Command parameter (3) +20 Command parameter (8)
+21 Command parameter (4) +21 Command parameter (9)
+22 Command parameter (5) +22 Reserved
+23 Reserved +23 Reserved
+24 Reserved +24 Reserved
+25 Reserved +25 Reserved
+26 Reserved +26 Reserved
+27 Reserved +27 Reserved
+28 Reserved +28 Reserved
+29 Reserved +29 Reserved
+30 Reserved +30 Reserved
+31 Reserved +31 Reserved
NOTE
1 A number and letter after # represent an AS-i slave number.
2 To group α, the standard slave or an A slave of the A/B slaves is assigned.
To group α+1, a B slave of the A/B slaves is assigned.
- 297 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
<Input>
Address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
X+0 DI of slave address #1 Reserved
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
X+1 DI of slave address #3 DI of slave address #2
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
: : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
X+15 DI of slave address #31 DI of slave address #30
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
<Output>
Address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Y+0 DO of slave address #1 Reserved
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Y+1 DO of slave address #3 DO of slave address #2
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
: : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
Y+15 DO of slave address #31 DO of slave address #30
OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
- 298 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
<Output>
Address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Y+0 DO of slave address #1A Reserved
G OUT4(NOTE) OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
r Y+1 DO of slave address #3A DO of slave address #2A
o OUT4(NOTE) OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT4(NOTE) OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
u : : : : : : : : :
p : : : : : : : : :
X+15 DO of slave address #31A DO of slave address #30A
α OUT4(NOTE) OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT4(NOTE) OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
G Y'+0 DO of slave address #1B Reserved
r Reserved OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
o Y'+1 DO of slave address #3B DO of slave address #2B
u Reserved OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 Reserved OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
p : : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
α Y'+15 DO of slave address #31B DO of slave address #30B
+ Reserved OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 Reserved OUT3 OUT2 OUT1
1
NOTE
A number and letter after # represent an AS-i slave number.
When the standard slave is used, DI/DO signals are assigned to group α (X+0 to
X+15 and Y+0 to Y+15).
When the A/B slave is used, OUT4 is reserved and cannot be used.
- 299 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
To use the AS-i safely, be sure to monitor the AS-i status.
When using DI/DO data on the AS-i side, be sure to monitor the AS-i power
supply monitor information in Subsection 8.9.5.2, the AS-i data ready bit in
Subsection 8.9.5.3, and other error information items. If any of these information
items indicates an error or illegal status, the DI/DO data on the AS-i converter
side is also invalid. So, correct the system to maintain the safe status.
- 300 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Mode 0: Discrepancy between LPS (list of configured slaves) and LES (list of detected slaves)
0: There is no discrepancy between LPS and LES.
1: There is a discrepancy between LPS and LES.
NOTE
If the list output mode is switched, up to about 3 seconds may be required until
an output change actually takes place after the mode switching. When reading
with a ladder, be sure to check the list output mode in status information
beforehand.
- 301 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 302 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
- 303 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
Command parameter
<1>
Request flag
<3>
<4>
End flag
Error status
Response data
Command execution
<2>
<1> PMC side: Command code is written after checking that both of the request flag and end flag are
OFF. If the command has parameter data, the parameter data is written simultaneously. Next, the
request flag is set to ON. Within the same scan period, command code may be written and the
request flag may be set to ON.
<2> Converter side: When the request flag is set, command code is read then the command is executed.
Upon completion of command execution, error status and response data are transferred then the end
flag is set to ON.
<3> PMC side: The end flag set to ON is awaited. When the end flag is set to ON, error status is read. In
the case of normal termination with response data, the response data is read. Upon completion of
processing, the end flag is set to OFF.
<4> Converter side: When the request flag is set to OFF, the end flag is set to OFF.
NOTE
The operations of <2> and <4> are performed by the AS-i converter.
- 304 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
(2) Reading the parameter of a particular slave from the EEPROM of the AS-i
master
Address bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Execution Y+17 0BH
data Y+18 Slave address (01H to 1FH, 21H to 3FH)(NOTE)
Y+19 to Y+21 Not set
Response X+25 Error code
data X+26 0 Parameter value
- 305 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Input an AS-i slave address number as follows:
Slave type Address input method
Standard slave or A slave Input an address number directly in hexadecimal (01H to 1FH).
B slave Input an address number added to 32 (20hex) in hexadecimal.
Example) When the address is 10B
10 + 32 → 42 (Input 2Ahex.)
An analog slave is a standard slave to which address distinction between A and
B is not applicable. So, input an address number directly in hexadecimal (01H to
1FH).
- 306 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
(4)AS-i 端子台
Operation mode In normal operation When the setting switch (DISP) is pressed
Configuration mode No display Displays all connected slaves at intervals of about one
second (display of LES).
Protection mode The smallest slave address Displays all configuration-mismatching slaves at intervals
among those of the of about one second (displays a list of discrepancies
configuration-mismatching between LPS and LES).
slaves is displayed. * No data is displayed when there is no
configuration-mismatching slave.
(Example)
When the following slaves are connected, the slave numbers are displayed in the order shown below:
Address #10 Standard slave
Address #20A A/B slave
Address #20B A/B slave
Address #30 Standard slave
X1 X1 X1 X1
- 308 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
Pressing this switch for less than 5 seconds Pressing this switch for less than 5 seconds
changes the mode to the protection mode. In this does not change the mode.
case, however, the configuration is not registered
and automatic addressing is not enabled.
NOTE
If a slave with address 0 is connected, the configuration cannot be registered
and the mode is not switched to the protection mode. Alarm E5 is indicated.
- 309 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
- 310 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
NOTE
1 In the protection mode, the smallest one of the addresses of the
configuration-mismatching slaves is displayed. No data is displayed in the
configuration mode.
2 Use a ladder program to detect and display an AS-i converter error.
3 When an AS-i converter error occurs, both of the DO signals and DI signals are
turned off.
4 When AS-i communication fails, a watchdog alarm is issued on the slave unit
side. When a slave watchdog alarm is issued, the behavior of DO signals is
determined by the type of slave unit and parameter setting. For details, refer to
the specifications of the slave unit.
5 Corrective action for an AS-i master EEPROM error
When the 7-segment LEDs indicate E1, the registered configuration may have
been destroyed. So, register the configuration again according to the procedure
below.
Turn off the power.
The 7-segment LEDs indicate "E1". (Keep the switch set to SET.)
Keep the switch set to SET until the LED ”CM” switches from off to on or vice versa.
(This operation may require 5 seconds or more.)
Release the switch. Next, turn off the power then turn on the power again to restart the system.
The register configuration is recovered if the 7-segment LEDs do not indicate "E1". (If the LED ”CM” is
turned on, protect the registered configuration in preparation for subsequent operation. Keep the switch
set to SET until the LED "CM" is turned off. This operation may require 5 seconds or more.)
If the 7-segment LEDs still indicate "E1" after the operation above,
replace the AS-i converter.
AS-i converters with this function were shipped in June, 2005 or later.
The corrective action mentioned above cannot be applied to those AS-i
converters that were shipped earlier. In this case, replace the AS-i converter if an
EEPROM error occurs.
- 311 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.9.8.1 Installation
The operation below can be performed even when the I/O Link is not connected (for example, when the
power to the CNC is not turned on with only the power to the AS-i converter and AS-i power supply
turned on or when the I/O Link cable is not connected).
Start
NO
End of installation
NOTE
1 When the operation mode is switched to the protection mode, the slave
configuration is registered and automatic addressing is enabled.
2 The operation mode remains unchanged, regardless of whether the power to the
AS-i converter is turned on or off. To switch the operation mode, use the SET
switch.
- 312 -
B-64483EN/01 8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link
a) Disconnected cable
The cause may be identified as a disconnected cable if all slaves after a particular slave are
configuration-mismatching slaves.
b) Communication error
A temporary communication error may be recovered by restarting the operation. In this case, however,
check whether a large noise source is located nearby and whether all connections are made normally.
d) No address setting
An AS-i slave with address "0" is connected.
- 313 -
8.UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC I/O Link B-64483EN/01
8.9.9 Others
8.9.9.1 CE marking
The AS-i converter has CE marking certification.
Note, however, that because of its conformance to the AS-i EN standard (EN50295), the AS-i converter
has not undergone surge test.
8.9.9.2 Fuse
The AS-i converter has a built-in fuse. If the fuse blows, replace the fuse after correcting the cause.
- 314 -
B-64483EN/01 9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP
NOTE
A servo motor attached to a vertical axis or spindle which is not manufactured by
FANUC may not stop. And, a stop of the spindle motor depends on a Ladder
program.
A controlled stop is the quickest. However, a stop may be made by immediately shutting off the motor
power for safety reasons.
WARNING
Pressing the RESET key stops the running program. As a result, the servo axis
stops and the spindle axis remains rotating without changing the speed. The
RESET key may not function due to an MDI failure or the like, so, for safety, use
the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to stop the motor safely.
When a failure of the control unit, machine contact, or connection is also
assumed, further safety actions must be taken.
- 315 -
9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP B-64483EN/01
Example 2)
When a servo alarm occurs
The motor power to the servo amplifier is shut off by the IGBT. When the spindle motor works
without any trouble, however, the spindle motor can be controlled independently and the motor
power to the spindle amplifier is not shut off by the IGBT. In this case, MCC control signals are not
output. When a spindle emergency stop signal is input using the Ladder program, the spindle motor
is decelerated to a stop. Then, the motor power is shut off through the IGBT, MCC control signals
are output, and the motor power is shut off electromechanically.
A failure in the amplifier may disable MCC control signals. To ensure motor power shut-off, therefore,
a circuit must be designed in a redundancy configuration having a route that is independent of the shut-off
function of the amplifier.
CAUTION
1 If the control unit enters the system alarm state, the Ladder program does not
run. In this case, the spindle amplifier can be decelerated to a stop. Make proper
parameter settings because such a stop depends on the settings.
2 If the spindle motor cannot be controlled due to an alarm in the spindle amplifier
itself or for some other reason, the motor power is shut off by the IGBT
immediately. After the servo motor has stopped, an MCC control signal is output.
To configure an emergency stop circuit in compliance with JIS safety standards in JIS B 9960-1
(IEC60204-1), observe the following cautions. JIS B 9960-1 specifies that an emergency stop circuit shall
function as a category 0 or 1 stop.
Category 0 stop:
Stopping by immediate removal of power to the machine actuators
Category 1 stop:
A controlled stop with power to the machine actuators available to achieve the stop and then removal of
power when the stop is achieved
Fig. 9.5 (a) shows an example showing how to make connections for the emergency stop signal with this
CNC controller and αi series servo amplifier to comply with the EC Machine Instructions. Fig. 9.5 (b)
shows a flow diagram of the emergency stop circuit signals.
- 317 -
9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP B-64483EN/01
Emergency stop
button S1
Safety relay
module Safety input 1
Emergency
Safety input 2
stop K1
MCC K0 Ready S2
Reset/
feedback input
CNC
Emergency stop K1
+24
*ESP
Emergency stop K1
+24(CX4) *ESP *ESP
*ESP(CX4) (CXA2A) (CXA2B)
Emergency stop K1 off delay
MCCOFF3(CX3)
MCCOFF4(CX3)
coil
Main circuit
breaker
NOTE
1 The above example of connections is equivalent to an emergency stop circuit
which functions as a category 1 stop.
2 Set the off delay timer for shutting the power to the magnetic contactor coil in the
above example as follows:
- Set a value which allows the time required to normally stop by the spindle.
- Set a value which allows the feed axis stop time also when the feed axis
quick stop function and vertical axis fall prevention function are used.
- 318 -
B-64483EN/01 9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP
Emergency stop
button S1
Safety relay
module Safety input 1
Emergency
Safety input 2
stop K1
MCC K0 Ready S2
Reset/
feedback input
CNC
Emergency stop K1
+24
Contact input *ESP(X8.4) Delay timer
*ESP(spindle)
Power to the
magnetic
contactor coil Power shut-off Power shut-off
coil
Main circuit
Motor Motor
breaker
MCC K0 AC reactor
CAUTION
1 This CNC controller can detect overtravel by using a software limit function. If
the software limit function does not operate effectively due to a failure, resulting
in a possible serious accident or loss, install a safety circuit, for example, a
stroke end limit switch arranged in series with the emergency stop button.
2 To use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by a manufacturer other than
FANUC, refer to the corresponding documentation as well as this manual.
Design the emergency stop sequence such that, if the emergency stop signal
contact opens while the spindle motor is rotating, the spindle motor is
decelerated until it stops.
- 319 -
9.STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP B-64483EN/01
Control unit
To prevent an emergency stop in one machine group from affecting another within a multi-path control
system, a separate emergency stop circuit (see Fig. 9.6 (b)) must be provided for each machine group.
Machine group 1 Machine group 2
Emergency stop Emergency stop
button S1 button S1
Safety relay Safety relay
module Safety input 1 module Safety input 1
Emergency Emergency
Safety input 2 Safety input 2
stop K1 stop K1
MCC K0 Ready S2 MCC K0 Ready S2
Reset/ Reset/
feedback input feedback input
CNC CNC
Emergency stop K1 Emergency stop K1
+24 +24
*ESP *ESP
Power to the magnetic contactor coil Spark killer Power to the magnetic contactor coil Spark killer
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
coil coil
Main circuit Main circuit
breaker breaker
Other CNC conditions Emergency Motor brake coil Other CNC conditions Emergency Motor brake coil
Break power (-) Break power (-)
conditions SA stop K1 conditions SA stop K1
- 320 -
B-64483EN/01 10.CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS
NOTE
For connection when an Ethernet connector (for Multi-function Ethernet)
provided on the LCD-mounted type control unit is used, refer to the FANUC
FL-net Board Connection Manual (B-64163EN) or FANUC Fast Ethernet/Fast
Data Server Operator’s Manual (B-64014EN) in addition to Section 5.5 in this
manual.
- 321 -
11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE B-64483EN/01
24V-IN(CPD16A)
I/O LINK(JD51A)
HDI(JA40)
MDI(CA55) See Chapters 4 to 10 for explanations about the
FSSB(COP10A-1) connection
FSSB(COP10A-2)
Ethernet
ETHERNET (CD38S)
Ethernet
ETHERNET (CD38B)
- 322 -
B-64483EN/01 11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE
Control unit
Main board
HSSB(COP21A)
MDI unit
(CK27)
Display unit
+24VDC power supply
MDI(CA55)
HSSB(COP21M)
24V-IN(CPD18)
{
RS-232-C I/O device
Personal computer
R232-2/USB(JD54) USB keyboard
USB printer
Ethernet
ETHERNET(CD38S)
For any connection other than the above, see Chapters 4 to 10.
- 323 -
11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE B-64483EN/01
11.2 INSTALLATION
CA76
COP10A-1
Rear view
COP10A-2
JD56A JA40
Fuse CA55
CPD16A
- 324 -
B-64483EN/01 11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE
Rear view
COP21M
CA55
- 325 -
11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 The values listed above do not include any heat output of the CPU card, servo
card, or option boards. To obtain the total heat output of the control unit, add the
heat output from the CPU card, servo card, and any option boards. For the heat
output from the CPU card, servo card, and option boards, see Subsection 3.3.2,
“Heat Output of Each Unit”.
2 See Chapter 6 for the heat output of the separate detector interface unit.
3 See Chapter 8 for the heat output of each I/O unit.
NOTE
1 The values listed above do not include any power supply capacity required by
option boards. For the power supply capacity required by option boards, see
Subsection 4.1.3, “Power Capacity of 24 VDC Power Supplies”.
2 When any RS-232C unit to which power is supplied from the control unit is
connected, add the required power capacity.
3 Use memory cards and USB memories that consume no more than 2.5 W.
4 See Chapter 6 for the power capacity of the separate detector interface unit.
5 For the power capacity of each I/O unit, see Chapter 8.
6 For selecting a 24 VDC power supply, there are restrictions on other than the
power capacity. Be sure to also see Subsection 4.1.2.
- 326 -
B-64483EN/01 11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE
WARNING
If the machine tool has a vertical axis, it is necessary to select a 24 VDC power
supply that can hold its output of 24 VDC for a prolonged time even after the AC
input has been interrupted (including power failure and instantaneous power
interruption) in order to keep a possible fall along the vertical axis within an
acceptable range. The control unit deenergizes servo circuits if its 24 VDC input
falls to 21.6 V or below. For this reason, failing to maintain the 24 VDC input to
the control unit for a satisfactory period after the AC input has been interrupted
may lead to a larger amount of fall along the vertical axis, depending on a
peripheral circuit in use, because the servo for the vertical axis is deenergized
before the peripheral circuit detects an AC input interruption and activates the
brake. In general, selecting a 24 VDC power supply having a power capacity
with a wide margin would prolong the hold time of the 24 VDC output after an AC
input interruption.
NOTE
Do not set the rotary switch to the Reserve position.
+24VDC input
1 +24V
2 0V Tyco Electronics
3 Housing Contact
GND LCD-mounted type 1-178288-3 1-175218-5
Display unit 2-178288-3 1-175218-5
Separate housings are used for the LCD-mounted Type and the display unit.
- 327 -
11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE B-64483EN/01
i) Cable connection
CPD16A
or External power
CPD18 supply
1
+24V +24V
2
0V 0V
NOTE
1 As countermeasures against noise, keep the power cable away from other
cables connected to the LCD-mounted type control unit or display unit.
2 Turn the power to the display unit on or off at the same time when turning the
power to the control unit on or off (within ±100 ms). The power to the display unit
cannot be turned on or off independently of the power to the control unit.
NOTE
1 The +24V signal is used as the power supply to FANUC’s RS-232C device.
2 Pins with no signal name must be left open.
3 The +5V pins with pin Nos. 18 and 20 must be left open.
- 328 -
B-64483EN/01 11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE
+24V 10 07 SG
+24V 19 25 +24V
シールド
Shield 01 FG
Ground 接地板
plate GND
SD 11 3 SD
0V 12
RD 01 2 RD
0V 02
RS 15 7 RS
0V 16
CS 05 8 CS
0V 06
DR 03 6 DR
0V 04
ER 13 4 ER
0V 14
CD 07 1 CD
0V 08
9 RI
+24V 10 Shield 5 SG
+24V 19 Ground plate
- 329 -
11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE B-64483EN/01
SD 11 3 SD
0V 12
RD 01 2 RD
0V 02
RS 15 7 RS
0V 16
CS 05 8 CS
0V 06
DR 03 6 DR
0V 04
ER 13 4 ER
0V 14
CD 07 1 CD
9 RI
+24V 10 Shield 5 SG
+24V 19 Ground plate
NOTE
For connection with a PC, create a cable according to the connector pin
arrangement on the PC side.
NOTE
1 The +24V signal is used as the power supply to FANUC’s RS-232C device.
2 This connector is used also as a USB port. The Reserve pins must be left open.
- 330 -
B-64483EN/01 11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE
SD 11 3 SD
0V 12
RD 01 2 RD
0V 02
RS 15 7 RS
CS 05 8 CS
DR 03 6 DR
0V 04
ER 13 4 ER
0V 14
CD 07 1 CD
9 RI
+24V 10 5 SG
+24V 19
Shield
Ground plate
- 331 -
11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE B-64483EN/01
SD 11 3 SD
0V 12
RD 01 2 RD
0V 02
RS 15 7 RS
CS 05 8 CS
DR 03 6 DR
0V 04
ER 13 4 ER
0V 14
CD 07 1 CD
9 RI
+24V 10 5 SG
+24V 19
Shield
Ground plate
NOTE
For connection with a PC, create a cable according to the connector pin
arrangement on the PC side.
NOTE
This connector is used also as a serial port. The Reserve pins must be left open.
- 332 -
B-64483EN/01 11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE
NOTE
1 Commercially available USB devices are prone to compatibility problems with
personal computers to some degree. It is not guaranteed that every
commercially available USB device can operate properly with personal
computers. Machine tool builders are requested to check the operability of the
USB devices they select. Keep in mind that commercially available USB devices
are generally neither dust-proof nor moisture-resistant.
2 Generally, USB devices can be connected with the power kept on (hot plugging).
With this connector (JD54), however, hot plugging cannot be performed. By
using a USB connector (type A, receptacle) as a relay connector, hot plugging
becomes possible in the outer range from the USB relay connector.
3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V) current on the front and rear sides
is 500 mA in total.
- 333 -
11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 Commercially available USB devices are prone to compatibility problems with
personal computers to some degree. It is not guaranteed that every
commercially available USB device can operate properly with personal
computers. Machine tool builders are requested to check the operability of the
USB devices they select. Keep in mind that commercially available USB devices
are generally neither dust-proof nor moisture-resistant.
2 The USB port on the front side allows a device to be connected to the port with
the power kept on (hot plugging).
3 The maximum USB power supply (USB_5V) current on the front and rear sides
is 500 mA in total.
- 334 -
B-64483EN/01 11.CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE
- Connector (CA76)
Connector used (device side) Molex Japan 5045-02A
Molex Japan 5051-02 (housing)
Mating connector (cable side)
Molex Japan 5159PBTL (terminal)
CA76
Resistor
01 + Buzzer
(connected
externally)
02 -
Buzzer ON
signal (internal
CNC signal)
0V
CAUTION
Never short-circuit the connector pins.
Be careful not to apply noise to the connection cable of the buzzer.
- 335 -
12.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS B-64483EN/01
12.2 CAUTIONS
The FANUC PANEL i or a Windows-compatible personal computer commercially available is to be
connected. The user (machine tool builder or end user) is required to procure and maintain a commercial
personal computer if the user is to use it. FANUC owns the copyright for the driver used to connect a
personal computer. The software mentioned above and the contents of the related manuals may not be
used or reproduced in part or whole without the prior written permission of FANUC.
NOTE
1 IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corp. of the US.
2 Windows is registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. of the US.
3 The company and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of the respective companies.
12.3.1 Overview
The high-speed serial bus (HSSB) enables the high-speed transfer of large amounts of data between a
commercial personal computer and the control unit, by connecting them via a high-speed optical fiber.
For an LCD-mounted type control unit, an HSSB interface board is inserted in an optional slot. For a
stand-alone type control unit, the HSSB interface is provided as standard. It also allows an HSSB
interface board to be inserted in an optional slot. On the personal computer, an appropriate interface board
is installed. You can use the FANUC PANEL i instead of a commercial PC. The FANUC PANEL i
comes standard with the HSSB interface.
- 336 -
B-64483EN/01 12.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS
COP21M
Commercial PC
COP21A
(main board)
COP21N
HSSB interface board for control
unit
COP21M (optional slot)
- 337 -
12.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS B-64483EN/01
(1) Remove the covering plate of extension slot on the personal computer.
(2) Insert the interface board for the personal computer to the PCI connector tightly.
(3) Screw the plate of interface board to the computer.
(4) Confirm connection (in only case of HSSB multi-connection)
Confirm following items for installing drivers of HSSB interface board in case of HSSB
multi-connection.
- PCI slot number which HSSB board is mounted (slot number is marked to PCB normally).
- Correspondence between HSSB channel and CNC
(5) Restore the covering plate.
NOTE
Do not touch the leads running to the card edge of the interface board (that
match with connectors).
- 338 -
B-64483EN/01 12.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS
COP21N
or COP21M
COP21A
NOTE
1 For explanations about how to specify the length of the underscored portion and
the related cautions, see Appendix D.
2 The machine tool builder cannot cut or connect any optical fiber cable. Be sure
to use the cables above.
- 339 -
12.CONNECTION WITH FANUC PANEL i AND COMMERCIAL PERSONAL COMPUTERS B-64483EN/01
12.4.1 Overview
You can connect the control unit with a commercial PC to use the PC as the display unit of the control
unit and transfer data between the control unit and PC, using Ethernet. You can also use the Ethernet
display function to perform maintenance and IPL operation for the control unit from the PC at power-on.
You can use the FANUC PANEL i instead of a commercial PC.
Ethernet port
Commercial PC
CD38A
(main board)
CD38R
CD38U Fast Ethernet board
(optional slot)
NOTE
1 For connection to the Ethernet interface, see Section 5.5.
2 For connection using the Fast Ethernet board, refer to the FANUC Fast
Ethernet/Fast Data Server Operator’s Manual (B-64014EN). When a PC is
connected using Fast Ethernet, the Ethernet display function cannot be used to
perform maintenance and IPL operation for the control unit from the PC at
power-on.
3 For the Ethernet display function, refer to Appendixes B and C in the FANUC
PANEL i Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN). The Ethernet
display function is available when a PC is connected using Embedded Ethernet
on a stand-alone type control unit. The function cannot be used on any
LCD-mounted type control unit or with Fast Ethernet.
- 340 -
B-64483EN/01 13.PANEL i
13 PANEL i
The PANEL i is on an IBM PC compatible panel computer. Connecting the PANEL i to the control unit
via an optical fiber (high-speed serial bus) or Ethernet can provide a system with PC functions.
For details of the PANEL i (including installation environment conditions and connection), refer to the
FANUC PANEL i Connection and Maintenance Manual (B-64223EN). For connection with the control
unit, see Chapter 12.
- 341 -
APPENDIX
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
- 345 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Weight: 2.4 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 346 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Weight: 2.6 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 347 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Weight: 3.5 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 348 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Weight: 5 kg
15" unit mounting hole machining drawing (Unit: mm)
(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then
secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
- 349 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Memory card
Weight: 1.7 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 350 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Memory card
Weight: 2.2 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 351 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Weight: 2.0 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 352 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
6-M4 stud
Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment
Weight: 3.2 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 353 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
8-M4 stud
Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment
Weight: 4.6 kg
(Unit: mm)
15" unit mounting hole machining drawing
(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then
secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
- 354 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
14-M4 stud
Max.
80mm
13mm
Top view
482.6
354.8
Front view
Mass: 5.8kg
(Unit: mm)
- 355 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
6.8
29.6
101.6
76.2
101.6
29.6
6.8
Rear view 38
Frame ground 85
M4 × 10mm
Fig. U10-2 Display unit for automobile manufacturer - 15” display unit
- 356 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
473
29.6
101.6
325 450
76.2
101.6
6.8
29.6
7.5
(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
Fig. U10-3 Display unit for automobile manufacturer - 15” display unit
- 357 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Weight: 0.6 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 358 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Weight: 1.0 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 359 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Weight: 1.0 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 360 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Connector
Fig. U13-2 Standard MDI unit (ONG, horizontal placement, backup unit)
- 361 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment
Weight: 1.2 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 362 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Connector
Weight: 1.7 kg
Backup unit
(Unit: mm)
Fig. U14-2 Standard MDI unit (ONG, vertical placement, backup unit)
- 363 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment
Weight: 1.0 kg
(Unit: mm)
- 364 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Connector
Weight: 1.5 kg
Backup unit (Unit: mm)
- 365 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Top view
Front view
Side view
Dashed line:
Area for packing attachment
Weight: 1.1 kg
(Unit: mm)
Panel cut drawing
(Mount the unit onto the outside of the cabinet then secure the unit with nuts from the inside.)
- 366 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Connector
- 367 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
3-M4
φ72, equally spaced
Mass: 0.2 kg
(Unit: mm)
Mass: 0.4kg
(Unit: mm)
- 368 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Mass: 0.4kg
(Unit: mm)
Fig. U19 Separate detector interface unit or analog input separate detector interface unit
- 369 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Fig. U20 Absolute pulse coder battery case for a separate detector
- 370 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Main unit
Lid
Mass: 0.9 kg (case only)
(Unit: mm)
- 371 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
- 372 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
The panel cut dimensions of this punch panel are indicated below.
- 373 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Mass : 0.1kg
Unit : mm
(for 1ch) (for 2ch)
- 374 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Connectors
Fig. title Specification No. Fig. No.
PCR connector (soldering type) PCR-E20FS Fig. C1 (a)
FI40 connector FI40-2015S Fig. C1 (b)
Connector case (PCR type manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN PCR-V20LA/PCR-V20LB Fig. C2 (a)
KOGYO)
Connector case (FI type manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC) FI-20-CV Fig. C2 (b)
Connector case (manufactured by FUJITSU COMPONENT) FCN-240C20-Y/S Fig. C2 (c)
Connector case (PCR type manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC) FI-20-CV7 Fig. C2 (d)
Connector (1) for servo side manufactured by Tyco Electronics AMP1-178128-3 Fig. C3 (a)
Connector (2) for servo side manufactured by Tyco Electronics AMP2-178128-3 Fig. C3 (b)
Connector (3) for +24 V power supply manufactured by Tyco AMP1-178288-3 Fig. C3 (c)
Electronics
Connector (4) for +24 V power supply manufactured by Tyco AMP2-178288-3 Fig. C3 (d)
Electronics
Contact for connector manufactured by Tyco Electronics AMP1-175218-2/5 Fig. C3 (e)
AMP1-175196-2/5
Connector (case) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO Fig. C4 (a)
Connector (angled case) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN Fig. C4 (b)
KOGYO
Connector (male) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO Fig. C4 (c)
Connector (female) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO Fig. C4 (d)
Connector (terminal layout) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN Fig. C4 (e)
KOGYO
Connector (3 pins/brown) manufactured by Burndy Japan SMS3PN-5 Fig. C5
Connector for flat cable manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC HIF3BB-50D-2.54R Fig. C6
HIF3BB-34D-2.54R
Connector (for MDI) manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics LY10-DC20 Fig. C7 (a)
Contact (for MDI) manufactured by Japan Aviation Electronics LY10-C2-3 Fig. C7 (b)
Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface Fig. C8 (a)
Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector Fig. C8 (b)
Connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) MRH-50FD Fig. C9
manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO
Connector (for loader I/O board) manufactured by Tyco Electronics AMP178214-1 Fig. C10
Faston terminal A02B-0166-K330 Fig. C11
- 375 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
- 376 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
- 377 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Fig. C2 (a) Connector case (PCR type manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO)
- 378 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
- 379 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Fig. C3 (a) Connector (1) for servo side manufactured by Tyco Electronics
- 380 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
Fig. C3 (b) Connector (2) for servo side manufactured by Tyco Electronics
Fig. C3 (c) Connector (3) for +24 V power supply manufactured by Tyco Electronics
- 381 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Fig. C3 (d) Connector (4) for +24 V power supply manufactured by Tyco Electronics
- 382 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
- 383 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
- 384 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
- 386 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
- 387 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
(pitch)
- 388 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
- 389 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
UNITS AND CONNECTORS APPENDIX B-64482EN/01
Fig. C9 Connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN
KOGYO
Fig. C10 Connector (for loader I/O board) manufactured by Tyco Electronics
- 390 -
A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF
B-64482EN/01 APPENDIX UNITS AND CONNECTORS
- 391 -
B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
- 392 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX CONNECTORS AND CABLES
- 393 -
B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
In addition to the combinations shown in Table B.1, Hirose soldering-type connectors can be combined
with the housings listed below. Ensure that the diameter of the cable used with each housing satisfies the
requirements of that housing.
Connector model Housing model (applicable cable diameter)
FI40B-2015S ⇔ FI-20-CV (8.5 mm in diameter) only
(formerly FI40-2015S)
- 394 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX CONNECTORS AND CABLES
NOTE
As pulse coder cables, the following cables are available: Cable that can be up
to 20 m long (A66L-0001-0286), cable that can be up to 30 m long
(A66L-0001-0402), and cable that can be up to 50 m (A66L-0001-0403).
Cables A66L-0001-0402 and A66L-0001-0403 have not only the same level of
oil resistance as conventional cables, but also bending resistance (cable, 100
mm in diameter, capable of withstanding at least 10 million bending cycles), and
are UL- and CSA-certified.
- 395 -
B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 Those tools indicated by shading are available from FANUC (specification
number A02B-0120-K391).
2 The tools available from each manufacturer are specifically designed for use with
the connectors manufactured by that manufacturer.
FANUC specification
Material Use Constitution Manufacturer Remark
number
2
10-pair cable General use 0.08mm A66L-0001-0284 #10P Hitachi Cable
10-pair Oki Electric Cable
SHINKO ELECTRIC
INDUSTRIES
12-conductor Pulsecoder, 0.5mm2 A66L-0001-0286 Hitachi Cable 20 m or less
composite linear scale, 6-conductor Oki Electric Cable
cable manual pulse 0.18mm2 3-pair SHINKO ELECTRIC
generator INDUSTRIES
0.75mm2 A66L-0001-0402 Oki Electric Cable 30 m or less
6-conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 3-pair movable parts
1.25mm2 A66L-0001-0403 Oki Electric Cable 50 m or less
6-conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 3-pair movable parts
- 396 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX CONNECTORS AND CABLES
10-pair cable
(a) Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. - A66L-0001-0284#10P
Manufacturer - Hitachi Cable,Ltd.
Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd.
SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
Rating - 60°C 30V : UL2789
80°C 30V : UL80276
Material Conductor - Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM
B-286)
Insulator - Cross-linked vinyl
Shield braid - Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath - Heat-resistant oil-proof vinyl
Number of pairs Pairs 10
Conductor Size AWG 28
Structure Conductors/mm 7/0.127
Outside diameter mm 0.38
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1
Thinnest portion : 0.8 (3.1mm)
Outside diameter mm 0.58
(approx.)
Core style (rating) mm UL15157(80°C , 30V)
Twisted pair Outside diameter mm 1.16
(approx.)
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay - Collect the required number of twisted pairs into
a cable, then wrap binding tape around the
cable. To make the cable round, apply a cable
separator as required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
Drain wire Conductors/mm Hitachi Cable : Not available
Oki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12
SHINKO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. :
Not available
Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12
Braid density % 85 or more
Sheath Color - Black
Thickness mm 1.0
Outside diameter mm 6.2
(approx.)
Standard length m 200
Packing method - Bundle
Electrical Electric resistance Ω/km 233 or less
performance (at 20°C )
Insulation resistance MΩ-km 10 or less
(at 20°C )
Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 300
Flame resistance - Shall pass flame resistance test VW-1SC of UL
standards.
- 397 -
B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
- 398 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX CONNECTORS AND CABLES
Item Unit Specifications
Drain wire Size mm2 0.3
Structure Wires/mm 12/0.18
Outside diameter mm 0.72
Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12
Thickness mm 0.3
Braid density % 70
Outside diameter mm 6.3
Sheath Color - Black
Standard thickness (The mm 1.1
minimum thickness is at
least 85% of the
standard thickness.)
Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0 (Note)
Standard length m 100
Packing method - Bundle
Electrical Electric resistance (at Ω/km 39.4 (1 to 6) 113 (7 to 9)
performance 20°C) (wire nos.)
Insulation resistance (at MΩ-km 15
20°C)
Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 500
Flame resistance - Shall pass flame resistance test VW-1SC of UL
standards.
NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other than the drain wire.
(c) Specifications
Item Specification
FANUC specification number A66L-0001-0402 A66L-0001-0403
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
A-conductor B-conductor A-conductor B-conductor
- 399 -
B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
Item Specification
Conductor Constitution 16/0.12 3/22/0.12 16/0.12 7/16/0.12
Number of conductors/ (0.18mm2) (0.75mm2) (0.18mm2) (1.25mm2)
mm
Typical outside diameter 0.55 1.20 0.55 1.70
(mm)
Insulation Color White, red, Red, black White, red, Red, black
(polyester) black black
Typical thickness (mm) 0.16 0.23 0.16 0.25
Typical outside diameter 0.87 1.66 0.87 2.20
(mm)
Pair twisting Constitution White-red, White-red,
white-black, white-black,
and black-red and black-red
Direction of twisting Left Left
Typical pitch: Typical pitch:
20 mm 20 mm
Assembling by Number of strands or 3 6 3 6
twisting conductors
Direction of twisting Left Left
Taping Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Twisting is wrapped with washi, or
Japanese paper, tape. Japanese paper, tape.
Typical outside diameter 5.7 6.9
(mm)
Braided Typical strand diameter 0.14
shielding (mm)
Typical density (mm) 80
Drain A 12/0.18 mm wire is roughly wrapped under braided shielding.
Typical outside diameter 6.4 7.6
(mm)
Sheath Color Black (matted)
(polyurethane) Typical thickness (mm) 1.05 1.1
Vertical taping Vertically taped with washi under sheathing.
Outside diameter (mm) 8.5±0.3 9.8±0.3
Finished Typical length (m) 100
assembly Short size Basically not approved.
Finished Rating 80°C 30V
assembly Standard Shall comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A
performance 80°C 30V FT-1.
Flame resistance Shall comply with VW-1 and FT-1.
Electrical Conductor resistance 103 or lower 25.5 or lower 103 or lower 15.0 or lower
performance Ω/km (20°C)
Insulation resistance 1 or higher
MΩ/km (20°C)
Dielectric strength A.C 500
V-min
Insulation Tensile strength 9.8 or higher
performance N/mm2
Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after At least 70% of that before aging
aging %
Elongation after At least 65% of that before aging
aging %
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
- 400 -
B.20-PIN INTERFACE
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX CONNECTORS AND CABLES
Item Specification
Sheathing Tensile strength N/mm2 9.8 or higher
performance Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after At least 70% of that before aging
aging %
Elongation after At least 65% of that before aging
aging %
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
Cable cross
section
- 401 -
B. 20-PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
⋅
⋅
⋅
Ω
Resistor
Check every ⋅
pin ⋅
⋅
- 402 -
C.CONNECTION CABLE
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX (SUPPLIED FROM US)
NOTE
1 The maximum cable lengths listed above apply only when the respective
recommended cables stated in the text are used. If a non-recommended cable is
used, the maximum cable length may not be guaranteed. Cables other than those
listed above are used between units in the 30i series. See the respective
descriptions in this manual for details of these cables.
2 This cable can be extended to up to 15 m if it is used within the cabinet.
SMS3PNS-5
I/O Unit (CP31)
MDI cable
LCD-mounted type FI-20-CV7
control unit or display A02B-0236-K813 45cm
unit for stand-alone
type
(CA55)
A02B-0236-K814 1.5m
LY10-DC20
MDI unit (CK1)
- 403 -
C. CONNECTION CABLE
(SUPPLIED FROM US) APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
FI40-2015S
Control unit (JA3)
A02B-0120-K848 7m
3
FI40-2015S
Control unit (JA3)
A02B-0120-K841 7m
Manual pulse
generator terminal
board
I/O Link i or I/O Link
cable
A02B-0120-K842 5m
I/O unit (JD1B)
PCR-E20FA
I/O unit (JD1A)
- 404 -
C.CONNECTION CABLE
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX (SUPPLIED FROM US)
Purpose Description Specification Length
I/O Link i or I/O Link
cable
Stabilized power
A02B-0124-K830 5m
supply (24 VDC)
AMP1-178288-3
Control unit (CP1A)
Ethernet extension
M3 crimp style terminal A02B-0323-K850 7m
connector
TMP21P-88P
569013-1
- 405 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
CAUTION
1 When an optical fiber cable is used for connection.
2 Optical fiber cables can be relayed at up to one point. The total length of the two
cables must not exceed the maximum transmission distance. The two cables
must be optical fiber cables of the same type.
3 There are the following restrictions on the cable length for the FSSB:
• Between the control unit and 1st slave unit:
- When A66L-6001-0026#L~ is used: 50 m
- When A66L-6001-0049#L~ is used: 100 m
• Between slave units: 40 m
• Total cable length per FSSB line in each control mode:
HRV2・・・・500m
HRV3・・・・200m
HRV4・・・・150m
- 406 -
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
21
Code
8.2
21
- 407 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
- 408 -
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
Table D (b) FANUC-approved cable manufacturers and cable model numbers (retail)
Fig. D (c) Protection of electrical/optical conversion module and optical fiber cable (when not in use)
- 409 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
• Grasp the optical connector firmly when connecting or disconnecting the cable. Do not pull on
the optical fiber cord itself. (The maximum tensile strength between the fiber cord and
connector is 2 kg. Applying greater force to the cord is likely to cause the connector to come
off, making the cable unusable.)
• Once connected, the optical connector is automatically locked by the lock levers on its top. To
remove the connector, release the lock levers and pull the connector.
• Although optical connectors cannot be connected in other than the correct orientation, always
take note of the connector's orientation before making the connection.
• Before installing an external cable, fix either a wire with a hook or a tension member to the
reinforcing cover of the optical connector and pull the wire or tension member, as shown in Fig.
D (d). This is done to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the fiber cord and
connector. If no tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and connector when installing
the cable, you can hold the reinforcing cover of the connector directly and pull it. In the case of
an internal cord, which does not have a reinforcing cover, apply the same protective measures,
as instructed in Fig. D (d), for that portion of the cable where the two cords are bound together,
in order to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the fiber cord and connector. In
the same way as for an external cable, if no tensile force is applied between the fiber cord and
connector during installation, you can hold the shielded part of the cable directly and pull it.
Because the combined tensile strength of the two cords is only 14 kg, however, avoid applying
too great a force to the cable during installation, regardless of whether you have taken the
protective measures.
Optical connector Reinforcing cover Optical connector
Tape Tape
2 cords combined
• Take care to keep both parts of the optical connector (cable side and PCB side) clean. If they
become dirty, wipe them with tissue paper or absorbent cotton to remove dirt. The tissue paper
or absorbent cotton may be moistened with ethyl alcohol. Do not use any organic solvent other
than ethyl alcohol.
• Fix the reinforcing cover of the external cable or the cord binding portion of the internal cord
type cable by using a cable clamp, as shown in Fig. D (e), to prevent the weight of the optical
fiber cable from being applied directly to the connecting part of the optical connector.
(Recommended cable clamp) Recommended cable clamps are listed below. Use a clamp that
grasps the optical fiber cable lightly; the clamp should not apply
excessive pressure to the cable.
For an external cable CKN-13SP (with sponge) (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
For an internal cord type cable MN-1 (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
- 410 -
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
Reinforcing cover of external cable or cord
Optical connector Optical fiber cord binding portion of internal cord type cable
• Any superfluous portion of the cable may be wound into loops. Should this prove necessary,
make sure the diameter of each loop is at least 150 mm (for an external cable) or at least 100
mm (for an internal cord type cable). Winding the cable into smaller loops may produce sharp
curves that exceed the specified bending radius limit without the user being aware. Such
bending can result in a greater transmission loss, ultimately leading to an optical
communication failure.
• When using a nylon band (cable tie) as a cable clamp, follow the instructions given below. Also,
take care not to apply a bending force to one particular part of the cable when fixing it with a
clamp. Failing to clamp the cable correctly may cut or damage it.
(External cable)
Do not clamp the uncovered portion of the cable with a nylon band. When clamping the
cable by the reinforcing cover, the clamping force is not an important factor to consider.
However, ensure that the clamping force is as small as possible to ensure that the
reinforcing cover is not deformed by the clamping. If possible, the clamping force should
be 5 kg or less.
(Internal cord type cable)
Lightly clamp the optical able with a nylon band so that the cable shield is not deformed.
If possible, the clamping force should be 1 or 2 kg (make sure that no force is applied to
the cable). Due care is required when clamping the internal cord type cable because its
cable shield is weaker than the reinforcing cover of the external cable.
- 411 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
10.16
R1.6
6.6
8.2
21±0.5
3.2 42±0.5
18.2±0.5
2.2
Mounting board
NOTE
Only one relay point is permitted.
- 412 -
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
6.6
8.2
21±0.3
3.2 42±1.0
18.1
2.2
Mounting board
NOTE
Only one relay point is permitted.
- 413 -
D.OPTICAL FIBER CABLE APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
NOTE
Ferrule: Movable metal at the tip of an optical connector; the fiber is bonded to
the ferrule.
Ferrule
Protective cover
(10) Cleaning
If the optical fiber junction adapter, optical-to-electrical conversion module, or optical fiber cable is
soiled, clean them according to the following procedures.
• Cleaning the optical fiber junction adapter and optical-to-electrical conversion module
First, clean the entire housing by wiping it with a cloth moistened with, or by washing it in, ethyl
alcohol. Similarly, wash the two sleeves in the adapter or wipe them with a cotton swab or the like.
• Cleaning optical fiber cables
For the optical fiber cables, it is important to clean the connectors at their ends. Any soiling on the
optical fiber end surfaces will hamper optical transmission, resulting in a malfunction. Wipe the
optical fiber end surfaces (that is, the ferrule end surfaces) thoroughly with a soft, clean cloth (like
gauze) moistened with ethyl alcohol, in the same way as described above. The use of cotton swabs
may prove convenient. The fiber end surfaces of low-loss optical fiber cables are lower than the
ferrules. To remove any soiling from the fiber end surfaces completely, push the cotton swab or
gauze into the depressions all the way through while rotating the ferrule. If the ferrules and optical
connectors are contaminated with oily substances, and they may extend over a cleaned fiber end
surface when it is attached to the optical-to-electrical conversion module, it is a good idea to wash
them before wiping the optical fiber end surfaces, using the procedure stated above.
- 415 -
E.MEMORY CARD INTERFACE APPENDIX B-64483EN/01
NOTE
1 If a CF card other than that purchased from FANUC is used, the operation is not
guaranteed.
2 The flash ATA card uses a quick format.
3 If your flash ATA card has not been formatted, do so using a personal computer.
In this case, format the card in the FAT16 format. Other formats are not
supported.
NOTE
1 To perform continuous operation with the CF adapter attached, be sure to push
lock lever A downward and then close the cover of the memory card interface.
2 The lock function is enabled only when the CF adapter (A02B-0303-K150) is
used.
3 The CF adapter must be inserted with label surface facing toward the screen.
2. Removal
• Open the cover of the memory card interface.
• Push lock lever A upward.
• Push eject button B once to project the button.
• Push eject button B again to eject the CF adapter.
• Remove the CF card with your fingers.
• Close the cover of the memory card interface.
NOTE
When lock lever A is in the lower position (in the locked state), eject button B
cannot be pushed.
- 416 -
B-64483EN/01 APPENDIX E.MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
Lock lever A
Eject button B
- 417 -
B-64483EN/01 INDEX
INDEX
Command interface with a ladder program ..................302
<Number> Component names........................................................230
20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES392 CONFIGURATION........................................... 1,144,198
24 VDC POWER (INSULATION AC/DC Configurations of LCD-mounted Type Control Units .....1
CONVERTOR) ..........................................................44 Configurations of Optional Boards ................................10
24 VDC Power Supply Specification .............................46 Configurations of Stand-alone Type Control Units..........5
2A Output Signal Connection ......................................153 Connecting 24 VDC Power............................................44
2A output signal specifications ....................................154 Connecting I/O Devices .................................................76
7-segment LED indication ...........................................307 Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit ...29
CONNECTING THE HIGH-SPEED SKIP (HDI).........86
<A> CONNECTION....................................... 121,235,264,292
Address map.................................................................250 Connection between Modules ......................................215
Analog 1Vp-p Interface................................................110 Connection Between the Basic Unit and Additional Unit
Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation .......................154 ..................................................................................115
Analog Input Signal Connections.................................155 CONNECTION BETWEEN THE LCD-MOUNTED
Analog Input Signal Specifications..............................156 TYPE CONTROL UNIT AND MDI UNIT ...............60
Applicable Cables ........................................................396 CONNECTION BETWEEN THE STAND-ALONE
Applicable wire ............................................................228 TYPE CONTROL UNIT AND DISPLAY UNIT
AS-i connection............................................................293 AND BETWEEN THE DISPLAY UNIT AND MDI
AS-i master status indication........................................299 UNIT ..........................................................................65
AS-i versions and ordering information .......................287 CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) .....403
ASSIGNMENT FOR I/O UNITS ................................136 Connection Diagram ................... 60,100,145,200,337,340
Assignment of Signals..................................................136 Connection Diagrams of an Analog Basic Unit ...........107
ATTACHING SCREW CAPS .......................................43 CONNECTION FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER
FUNCTION WITH Windows® CE .........................322
<B> Connection of Basic and Extension Modules...............159
BATTERIES ..................................................................53 Connection of Battery for Absolute Position Detector.113
Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor Connection of Extension Module C (2A Output
(6VDC).......................................................................59 Module) ....................................................................152
Battery for Memory Backup in the Control Unit (3 Connection of Extension Module D (Analog Input
VDC) ..........................................................................54 Module) ....................................................................154
Battery for Separate Absolute Pulsecoders (6VDC) ......58 Connection of FANUC I/O Link i or I/O Link by Optical
Board status..................................................................300 Fiber Cable ...............................................................124
BOARD-MOUNTED CONNECTORS .......................392 Connection of I/O Link i or I/O Link by Electric Cable123
Buzzer Interface ...........................................................335 CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR
CONNECTOR PANEL............................................144
<C> CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATOR'S
Cabinet ...........................................................................25
PANEL (FOR MATRIX INPUT) ............................170
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing...............................34
CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE FOR OPERATOR'S
Cable Connection .........................................................339
PANEL AND I/O MODULE FOR POWER
Cable connection to a terminal block ...........................248
MAGNETICS CABINET ........................................185
CABLE CONNECTORS .............................................393
CONNECTION OF I/O MODULE TYPE-2 FOR
CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR PANEL............................................198
....................................................................................53
Connection of Power Supply .......................................101
Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator ...................140
CONNECTION OF TERMINAL TYPE I/O
CAUTIONS .................................................................336
MODULE.................................................................223
CAUTIONS ABOUT MULTI-PATH CONTROL ......320
Connection of the Basic Module, and Extension
CAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION
Modules A and B......................................................147
DESIGN OF MACHINE TOOL POWER
CONNECTION OF THE I/O Link-AS-i CONVERTER
MAGNETICS CABINETS ........................................18
..................................................................................287
CE marking ..................................................................314
CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS ...................60
Channel selection and A/D conversion data.................156
CONNECTION TO CONTROL UNIT .......................327
Code Output for the Rotary Switch..............................278 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link i AND FANUC
Command Execution by a Ladder Program .................302
I/O Link....................................................................120
Command handshake sequence....................................304
CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS ................321
i-1
INDEX B-64483EN/01
i-2
B-64483EN/01 INDEX
Inter-module connection ..............................................247 Power ON/OFF control signal connection ...................272
POWER SUPPLY........................................................141
<K> Power Supply Capacity of a 24 VDC Power Supply ...326
Key Layout of MDI Unit................................................62 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ................. 44,214,271
Key Tops on the Main Panel ........................................284 Power supply rating .....................................................227
Power supply specification ..........................................283
<L> Power-off Sequence .......................................................51
LCD PROTECTION COVER........................................43 Power-on Sequence........................................................50
LCD-mounted Type Control Unit .........................322,324 PREFACE .................................................................... p-1
LCD-mounted Type Control Unit Overview..................11 Procedure for Installing Personal Computer Interface
LED indication.............................................................307 Boards ......................................................................338
LED Status Indication and Setting Switch Operation ..307 Protective Ground (Grounding for Protection against
Lightning Surge Absorber Installation ...........................37 Indirect Contact).........................................................28
LINKING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE ..................89
<R>
<M> Recommended Connectors...........................................396
Main panel specification ..............................................283 RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE
Main Power Input.........................................................327 HOUSINGS, AND CABLES ...................................395
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR ..............................139 Replacing commercially available alkaline dry cells
Manual Pulse Generator Connection (size D) .......................................................................56
........................................ 139,158,179,193,215,247,276 Replacing the lithium battery .........................................54
Manual Pulse Generator Signal Specifications ............140 Rotary Switch Setting ..................................................168
Meaning of key symbols ..............................................284 RS232-C Interface Specification....................................79
MEMORY CARD INTERFACE .................................416 RS232-C Serial Port.......................................................77
Method for checking the encoder signals.....................112
Method of common pin expansion ...............................257 <S>
Module Installation ......................................................160 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................... s-1
Module Specifications....................................146,201,224 SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE .......................98
Mounting the Module...................................................217 Separate Detector Interface (Analog Input) .................110
Separate Detector Interface (Digital Input) ..................103
<N> Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification ............101
Network Installation.......................................................93 Separating Signal Lines .................................................32
Noise Suppressor............................................................33 Serial port 1..................................................................328
Normal operation .........................................................313 Serial Port 2 .................................................................330
Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit 118 Serial Port and USB Port..............................................328
Number of Units That Can Be Connected......................97 SERVO AND SPINDLE INTERFACES.......................95
Setting the rotary switch ..............................................256
<O> Setting/display switch ..................................................309
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE...........................................406 Settings.........................................................................250
Order specification .......................................................283 SHUTTING OFF THE MOTOR POWER...................315
Other Notes ............................................. 165,182,196,221 Signal assignment on terminal blocks ..........................237
Others....................................................................257,314 Slave list.......................................................................300
Outline..........................................................................279 Soldering Type Connector ...........................................394
OUTLINE DRAWINGS OF UNITS AND Specification ................................................................261
CONNECTORS .......................................................345 Specification of the I/O Link side ................................288
Outline of main panel...................................................279 Specification of Twisted-Pair Cable ..............................91
Outline of sub panel A .................................................280 Specifications................................................. 181,195,288
Outline of sub panel D .................................................281 Specifications of a Commercial PC .............................337
Overall Connection Diagram .................. 170,185,235,292 Specifications of the AS-i converter ............................288
Overview........ 65,76,95,98,120,223,260,266,287,336,340 Specifications of the Standard Machine Operator’s
Overview of the Analog Basic Unit .............................106 Panel.........................................................................283
Stand-alone Type Control Unit Overview......................12
<P> Status Alarm.................................................................138
PANEL i.......................................................................341
STOP AND EMERGENCY STOP ..............................315
Parallel DO (output signal) connection ........................258
STOP MODES.............................................................315
Parallel interface ..........................................................104
STOPPING THE SERVO MOTOR.............................316
Pin assignment .............................................................270
STOPPING THE SPINDLE MOTOR .........................316
Power Capacity of 24 VDC Power Supplies ..................48
Power Connection ................................... 171,186,236,292
i-3
INDEX B-64483EN/01
<T>
Temperature Rise within the Machine Tool Magnetic
Cabinet .......................................................................20
Thermal Design of Operator's Panel ..............................21
THERMAL DESIGN OF THE MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC CABINET.............................................20
TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR FASTENING UNITS
AND GROUND TERMINALS..................................40
Total Connection Diagram ...........................................268
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS...................13,322
TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE
CONTROL UNIT.......................................................50
Types of commands executable by a ladder program ..302
Types of modules .........................................................224
<U>
Unit Dimensions...........................................................216
UNITS CONNECTED TO FANUC I/O Link i AND
FANUC I/O Link......................................................142
USB PORT.....................................................................94
USB port (front side)....................................................334
USB port (rear side) .....................................................332
<V>
Vertical-type Connectors .............................................392
<W>
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING
DESIGNING .............................................................s-4
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS REGARDING
MOUNTING, WIRING, AND EXCHANGING.......s-2
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
REGARDING DAILY MAINTENANCE ................s-5
Weight..........................................................................228
When a pendant type manual pulse generator..............276
When only the manual pulse generator ........................276
With the 10.4” Display Unit...........................................65
With the 15” Display Unit..............................................72
With the Display Unit for Automotive...........................73
With Two Display Units ................................................67
i-4
Revision Record
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
(B-64483EN)
* B - 6 4 4 8 3 E N / 0 1 *
Addition of FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
2. Summary of change
Maintenance
parts
Notice
Correction
TITLE
CUST.
01 10.08.23 Miyashita New issue DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
CM51
CM52
CMB3
CMB4
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
CM51 CM52
33 DICOM1 01 Xm+0.0 33 0V 01 Xm+6.0
34 Xm+0.2 02 Xm+0.3 34 Xm+6.2 02 Xm+6.3
19 Xm+0.1 19 Xm+6.1
35 Xm+0.5 03 Xm+0.6 35 Xm+6.5 03 Xm+6.6
20 Xm+0.4 20 Xm+6.4
36 Xm+1.0 04 Xm+1.1 36 Xm+7.0 04 Xm+7.1
21 Xm+0.7 21 Xm+6.7
37 Xm+1.3 05 Xm+1.4 37 Xm+7.3 05 Xm+7.4
22 Xm+1.2 22 Xm+7.2
38 Xm+1.6 06 Xm+1.7 38 Xm+7.6 06 Xm+7.7
23 Xm+1.5 23 Xm+7.5
39 Xm+2.1 07 Xm+2.2 39 Xm+8.1 07 Xm+8.2
24 Xm+2.0 24 Xm+8.0
40 Xm+2.4 08 Xm+2.5 40 Xm+8.4 08 Xm+8.5
25 Xm+2.3 25 Xm+8.3
41 Xm+2.6 09 Xm+2.7 41 Xm+8.6 09 Xm+8.7
26 Xm+3.0 26 Xm+9.0
42 Xm+3.1 10 Xm+3.2 42 Xm+9.1 10 Xm+9.2
27 Xm+3.3 27 Xm+9.3
43 Xm+3.4 11 Xm+3.5 43 Xm+9.4 11 Xm+9.5
28 Xm+3.6 28 Xm+9.6
44 Xm+3.7 12 Xm+4.0 44 Xm+9.7 12 Xm+10.0
29 Xm+4.1 29 Xm+10.1
45 Xm+4.2 13 Xm+4.3 45 Xm+10.2 13 Xm+10.3
30 Xm+4.4 30 Xm+10.4
46 Xm+4.5 14 Xm+4.6 46 Xm+10.5 14 Xm+10.6
31 Xm+4.7 31 Xm+10.7
47 Xm+5.0 15 Xm+5.1 47 Xm+11.0 15 Xm+11.1
32 Xm+5.2 32 Xm+11.2
48 Xm+5.3 16 Xm+5.4 48 Xm+11.3 16 Xm+11.4
49 Xm+5.5 17 Xm+5.6 49 Xm+11.5 17 Xm+11.6
50 Xm+5.7 18 24V 50 Xm+11.7 18 24V
CMB3 CMB4
33 0V 01 Yn+0.0 14 Yn+6.0 01 Yn+6.1
8 Yn+6.2
34 Yn+0.2 02 Yn+0.3 15 Yn+6.3 02 Yn+6.4
19 Yn+0.1 9 Yn+6.5
35 Yn+0.5 03 Yn+0.6 16 Yn+6.6 03 Yn+6.7
20 Yn+0.4 10 Yn+7.0
36 Yn+1.0 04 Yn+1.1 17 Yn+7.1 04 Yn+7.2
21 Yn+0.7 11 Yn+7.3
37 Yn+1.3 05 Yn+1.4 18 Yn+7.4 05 Yn+7.5
22 Yn+1.2 12 Yn+7.6
38 Yn+1.6 06 Yn+1.7 19 Yn+7.7 06 Yn+5.6
23 Yn+1.5 13 Yn+5.7
39 Yn+2.1 07 Yn+2.2 20 DOCOM 07 0V
24 Yn+2.0
40 Yn+2.4 08 Yn+2.5
25 Yn+2.3
41 Yn+2.6 09 Yn+2.7
26 Yn+3.0
42 Yn+3.1 10 Yn+3.2
27 Yn+3.3
43 Yn+3.4 11 Yn+3.5
28 Yn+3.6 (Note)
44 Yn+3.7 12 Yn+4.0 1. Xm+8 through Xm+11 and Yn+4 through Yn+7
29 Yn+4.1
45 Yn+4.2 13 Yn+4.3 can be used only for the A16B-2204-0260.
30 Yn+4.4
46 Yn+4.5 14 Yn+4.6 2. Connector CMB4 is not mounted when
31 Yn+4.7
47 Yn+5.0 15 Yn+5.1 A16B-2204-0261 is selected.
32 Yn+5.2
48 Yn+5.3 16 Yn+5.4
49 Yn+5.5 17 DOCOM
50 DOCOM 18 DICOM2
NOTE
CM51, CM52, CMB3: Recommended cable-side connector: A63L-0001-0134#01
(Connector: HONDA MR-50F, Case: HONDA MR-50L)
Recommended wire material: A66L-0001-0042
(7/0.18, 50 pins)
CMB4: Recommended cable-side connector: A63L-0001-0134#02
(Connector: HONDA MR-20F, Case: HONDA MR-20L)
Recommended wire material: A66L-0001-0041
(7/0.18, 20 pins)
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Pin number
Address number +24V
Bit number CM51(18), CM52(18)
Xm+0.0 CM51(01)
RV
Xm+0.1 CM51(19)
RV
Xm+0.2 CM51(34)
RV
Xm+0.3 CM51(02)
RV
Xm+0.4 CM51(20)
RV
Xm+0.5 CM51(35)
RV
Xm+0.6 CM51(03)
RV
Xm+0.7 CM51(21)
RV
DICOM1 CM51(33)
CM52(33), CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)
Xm+1.0 CM51(36)
RV
Xm+1.1 CM51(04)
RV
Xm+1.2 CM51(22)
RV
Xm+1.3 CM51(37)
RV
Xm+1.4 CM51(05)
RV
Xm+1.5 CM51(23)
RV
Xm+1.6 CM51(38)
RV
Xm+1.7 CM51(06)
RV
DICOM1 CM51(33)
CM52(33), CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Xm+2.0 CM51(24)
RV
Xm+2.1 CM51(39)
RV
Xm+2.2 CM51(07)
RV
Xm+2.3 CM51(25)
RV
Xm+2.4 CM51(40)
RV
Xm+2.5 CM51(08)
RV
Xm+2.6 CM51(41)
RV
Xm+2.7 CM51(09)
RV
Xm+3.0 CM51(26)
RV
Xm+3.1 CM51(42)
RV
Xm+3.2 CM51(10)
RV
Xm+3.3 CM51(27)
RV
Xm+3.4 CM51(43)
RV
Xm+3.5 CM51(11)
RV
Xm+3.6 CM51(28)
RV
Xm+3.7 CM51(44)
RV
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Xm+4.0 CM51(12)
RV
Xm+4.1 CM51(29)
RV
Xm+4.2 CM51(45)
RV
Xm+4.3 CM51(13)
RV
Xm+4.4 CM51(30)
RV
Xm+4.5 CM51(46)
RV
Xm+4.6 CM51(14)
RV
Xm+4.7 CM51(31)
RV
CMB3(18)
DICOM2
CM52(33), CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)
Xm+5.0 CM51(47)
RV
Xm+5.1 CM51(15)
RV
Xm+5.2 CM51(32)
RV
Xm+5.3 CM51(48)
RV
Xm+5.4 CM51(16)
RV
Xm+5.5 CM51(49)
RV
Xm+5.6 CM51(17)
RV
Xm+5.7 CM51(50)
RV
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Xm+6.0 CM52(01)
RV
Xm+6.1 CM52(19)
RV
Xm+6.2 CM52(34)
RV
Xm+6.3 CM52(02)
RV
Xm+6.4 CM52(20)
RV
Xm+6.5 CM52(35)
RV
Xm+6.6 CM52(03)
RV
Xm+6.7 CM52(21)
RV
Xm+7.0 CM52(36)
RV
Xm+7.1 CM52(04)
RV
Xm+7.2 CM52(22)
RV
Xm+7.3 CM52(37)
RV
Xm+7.4 CM52(05)
RV
Xm+7.5 CM52(23)
RV
Xm+7.6 CM52(38)
RV
Xm+7.7 CM52(06)
RV
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Xm+8.0 CM52(24)
RV
Xm+8.1 CM52(39)
RV
Xm+8.2 CM52(07)
RV
Xm+8.3 CM52(25)
RV
Xm+8.4 CM52(40)
RV
Xm+8.5 CM52(08)
RV
Xm+8.6 CM52(41)
RV
Xm+8.7 CM52(09)
RV
Xm+9.0 CM52(26)
RV
Xm+9.1 CM52(42)
RV
Xm+9.2 CM52(10)
RV
Xm+9.3 CM52(27)
RV
Xm+9.4 CM52(43)
RV
Xm+9.5 CM52(11)
RV
Xm+9.6 CM52(28)
RV
Xm+9.7 CM52(44)
RV
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Xm+10.0 CM52(12)
RV
Xm+10.1 CM52(29)
RV
Xm+10.2 CM52(45)
RV
Xm+10.3 CM52(13)
RV
Xm+10.4 CM52(30)
RV
Xm+10.5 CM52(46)
RV
Xm+10.6 CM52(14)
RV
Xm+10.7 CM52(31)
RV
Xm+11.0 CM52(47)
RV
Xm+11.1 CM52(15)
RV
Xm+11.2 CM52(32)
RV
Xm+11.3 CM52(48)
RV
Xm+11.4 CM52(16)
RV
Xm+11.5 CM52(49)
RV
Xm+11.6 CM52(17)
RV
Xm+11.7 CM52(50)
RV
DICOM1 CM51(33)
CM52(33), CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24 V at CM51 (18) and CM52 (18) is for DI signals. Do
not supply 24 V DC to these pins from the outside.
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
CMB3(17,50)
CMB4(20)
CMB3(01)
CMB3(19)
CMB3(34)
CMB3(02)
CMB3(20)
CMB3(35)
CMB3(03)
CMB3(21)
CMB3(36)
CMB3(04)
CMB3(22)
CMB3(37)
CMB3(05)
CMB3(23)
CMB3(38)
CMB3(06)
CM52(33),CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Yn+2.0 CMB3(24)
Yn+2.1
CMB3(39)
Yn+2.2
CMB3(07)
Yn+2.3
CMB3(25)
Yn+2.4
CMB3(40)
Yn+2.5
CMB3(08)
Yn+2.6
CMB3(41)
Yn+2.7
CMB3(09)
Yn+3.0
CMB3(26)
Yn+3.1
CMB3(42)
Yn+3.2
CMB3(10)
Yn+3.3
CMB3(27)
Yn+3.4
CMB3(43)
Yn+3.5
CMB3(11)
Yn+3.6
CMB3(28)
Yn+3.7
CMB3(44)
CM52(33),CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Yn+4.0 CMB3(12)
Yn+4.1
CMB3(29)
Yn+4.2
CMB3(45)
Yn+4.3
CMB3(13)
Yn+4.4
CMB3(30)
Yn+4.5
CMB3(46)
Yn+4.6
CMB3(14)
Yn+4.7
CMB3(31)
Yn+5.0
CMB3(47)
Yn+5.1
CMB3(15)
Yn+5.2
CMB3(32)
Yn+5.3
CMB3(48)
Yn+5.4
CMB3(16)
Yn+5.5
CMB3(49)
Yn+5.6
CMB4(06)
Yn+5.7
CMB4(13)
CM52(33),CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Yn+6.0 CMB4(14)
Yn+6.1
CMB4(01)
Yn+6.2
CMB4(08)
Yn+6.3
CMB4(15)
Yn+6.4
CMB4(02)
Yn+6.5
CMB4(09)
Yn+6.6
CMB4(16)
Yn+6.7
CMB4(03)
Yn+7.0
CMB4(10)
Yn+7.1
CMB4(17)
Yn+7.2
CMB4(04)
Yn+7.3
CMB4(11)
Yn+7.4
CMB4(18)
Yn+7.5
CMB4(05)
Yn+7.6
CMB4(12)
Yn+7.7
CMB4(19)
CM52(33),CMB3(33),
CMB4(07)
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
50 10
Approx 100
8.10.7 Specifications
Installation specifications
Install this unit in a fully enclosed cabinet.
For other installation conditions, conform to the CNC installation conditions.
NOTE
1. The above power supply rating does not include that to be input to DOCOM for
DO output.
2. To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and JD1B,
the above power supply rating + 70 mA is required.
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
NOTE
Be sure to connect all DO power supply pins DOCOM. The maximum current that
is allowed to pass to each DOCOM terminal pin is 2.0 A, and care must be paid to
prevent the sum of the load current from exceeding the current that is allowed to
pass via the DOCOM terminal.
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
For A16B-2204-0261
DI space map DO space map
Xm 1 Yn1
Xm 1 + 1 Yn1 + 1
Output signal Slot 1
Xm 1 + 2 Yn1 + 2
Xm 1 + 3 Yn1 + 3
Input signal Slot 1
Xm 1 + 4
Xm 1 + 5
Xm 1 + 6
Xm 1 + 7
Basically, for this unit, allocate 12-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 8-byte DO addresses to slot 1 for
A16B-2204-0260, or 8-byte DI addresses to slot 1 and 4-byte DO addresses to slot 1 for A16B-2204-0261.
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Xm Yn
Xm+1 Yn+1
Xm+2 Yn+2
Xm+3 Yn+3 Output signal
Xm+4 Yn+4
Xm+5 Input signal Yn+5
Xm+6 Yn+6
Xm+7 Yn+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12
Xm+13 Not used
Xm+14
Xm+15 (DO alarm DO alarm
detection) detection
Xm Yn
Xm+1 Yn+1
Output signal
Xm+2 Yn+2
Xm+3 Yn+3
Input signal
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11 Not used
Xm+12
Xm+13
Xm+14
Xm+15 (DO alarm DO alarm
detection) detection
For connection to the I/O Link, addresses are allocated to input signals and DO alarm detection at a time. For
this reason, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (output signals)
For ON/OFF of the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DO signals (output signals), see Subsection 8.2.4.4.
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
For A16B-2204-0260
Slot number Alarm information number Address of the DO driver which detects an error
1 0 Yn1
1 1 Yn1+1
1 2 Yn1+2
1 3 Yn1+3
1 4 Yn1+4
1 5 Yn1+5
1 6 Yn1+6
1 7 Yn1+7
For A16B-2204-0261
Slot number Alarm information number Address of the DO driver which detects an error
1 0 Yn1
1 1 Yn1+1
1 2 Yn1+2
1 3 Yn1+3
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
TITLE
CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-64483EN/01-01
Spec.No./Version B-64483EN/01
2. Summary of change
Extension module E
Analog output
(Note 1)
Number of input channels 4 channels
Analog output range (Note 2) -10 VDC to +10 VDC (external load resistance 10kΩ or more)
0 VDC to +20 mA (external load resistance 400Ω or less)
Digital conversion range 12 bits (binary), two's complement representation
Input/output correspondence
Analog output
Digital input
Voltage output Current output
+2000 +10V -
+1000 +5V +20mA
0 0V 0mA
-1000 -5V -
-2000 -10V -
Resolution 5 mV or 20 μA
Overall precision Voltage input: ±0.5% (with respect to full scale)
Current input: ±1.0% (with respect to full scale)
(Note 3)
D-A conversion time 1ms or less
2 Minimum update period of digital output Ladder scan period of CNC connected
Minimum update period of digital input
(NOTE)
2 Number of occupied input/output points (Note 4) DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes
For connection to the I/O Link : DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes
For connection to the I/O Link i : DO = 2 bytes
CAUTION
1 One of the four channels must be selected for output using a ladder program.
(See Item, “Channel selection and D/A conversion data for extension module E” in the Subsection 8.6.6.1,
“Address map”.)
2 There is a choice between use for voltage output or use for current output during connection to the terminal
section.
3 The conversion time refers to that only within the module. The actual response time includes the scan time
determined depending on the system.
2 4 The 3 DI bytes are automatically occupied at assignment, but not used. (See Item, “Channel selection and
D/A conversion data for extension module E” in the Subsection 8.6.6.1, “Address map”.)
For connection to the I/O Link, 3 bytes of DI are automatically occupied at assignment, but not used. (See
Item, “Channel selection and D/A conversion data for extension module E” in the Subsection 8.6.6.1,
“Address map”.)
For connection to the I/O Link i, assignment of 3 bytes of DI are unnecessary.
T1
Communication
status display
LED
Alarm status
display LED CA105
T4
Connector /
T3 terminal
Use
JD1A board
number
CP11 24-VDC power supply input
JD1A Second I/O link stage
JD1B First I/O link stage
CA105 Extension module connection
CP11 JD1B T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green
label
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label
T4 DI terminal board with pink label
Earth terminal
JD1B JD1A
T1
24 VDC power supply Relay, etc.
Terminal block
CP11
16 DO points
T2
Basic module Relay, etc.
Switch, etc.
T3
GND 24 DI
points
CA105
T4
Inter-module Switch, etc.
cable A
Power supply for load
Manual pulse Extension module A
JA3
T1
generator With manual pulse Relay, etc.
Terminal block
generator 16 DO points
T2
Manual pulse or Relay, etc
CA106
generator Extension module B, C, D
or E Switch, etc.
T3 T4
Without manual pulse 24 DI
Manual pulse points
generator CA105 generator
Switch, etc.
T1 Power supply for load
Terminal block
Relay, etc.
Inter-module cable 16 DO points
T2
A Relay, etc.
CA106 Extension module B, C, D
or E
T3 T4
cable A
Terminal block
Extension module B, C, D
or E Relay, etc.
16 DO points
T2
Switch, etc.
CA105 24 DI
Switch, etc. points
CAUTION
Extension module C does not have DI points. Only the terminal blocks for DO, T1 and T2, are available.
With extension module D, only the terminal blocks for analog input, T1 and T2, are available. With extension
module E, only the terminal blocks for analog output, T1 and T2, are available.
CAUTION
1 Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to the CNC is turned on, and that +24 V is
removed either when or after the power to the CNC is turned off.
2 When turning off the power to the CNC control unit, be sure to turn off the power to the terminal type I/O
module and other slave I/O units connected via the I/O Link as well.
○
0V
0V C : Control circuit
CAUTION
The circuitry enclosed in the dashed rectangle shown above is mounted on the basic module only. In the case
of an extension module, 24 V for DICOM1 is supplied via the extension cable from the basic module or the
extension module at the preceding stage.
SHEET
EDIT. DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 8/10
CAUTION 2
As listed in the table below, Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI terminals for which a common voltage can be
selected. That is, by connecting DICOM0 (T3-1 and T3-6 T4-1 pins) to +24 V, a DI signal can be input with its
logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON
state DI signal. From the safety viewpoint, the connection of DICOM0 (T3-1 and T3-6 T4-1 pins) to 0 V is
recommended wherever possible. 2
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed (from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and
from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the input is “0”. For the unconnected terminals at the addresses for which a
common voltage can be selected (from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7), the input is “0” when DICOM0 (T3-1 and T3-6 2
T4-1 pins) is connected to 0 V or “1” when it is connected to +24. Connect DICOM0 when used. When
addresses from Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 are not used, connect DICOM0 to the 0 V power supply.
Common voltage for the basic module, and extension modules A and B
Address Common voltage
Xm Can externally be selected with DICOM0.
Xm+1 Cannot be selected.
Xm+2 Cannot be selected.
Earth terminal
A02B-0166-K330
Earth terminal Tyco Electronics
170604-1
JST
Spec.No./Version B-64483EN/01
2. Summary of change
Maintenance
parts
Notice
Correction
Another
Item 9.5. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL Correct Immediately
TITLE
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i- MODEL B
The modification of CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE)
Modified as Following.
Warning
The safety machine should be designed based on the evaluation results of machine risk
assessment. Use the emergency stop signal properly in order to design the safety
machine.
To configure an emergency stop circuit in compliance with the safety standards of IEC60204-1 in
which requirements for electrical components of machine are specified, observe the following
cautions. IEC60204-1 specifies that an emergency stop circuit shall function as a category 0 or 1
stop.
Category 0 stop:
Stopping by immediate removal of power to the machine actuators(Uncontrolled stop)
Category 1 stop:
A controlled stop with power to the machine actuators available to achieve the stop and then
removal of power when the stop is achieved
(Controlled stop)
Fig. 9.5(a) or Fig. 9.5(b) shows an example showing how to make connections for the emergency
stop signal with this CNC controller and servo amplifier(αi series or βi series) to comply with the
EU Machine Instructions. Fig. 9.5(c) shows a flow diagram of the emergency stop circuit signals.
The emergency stop signal is input to the Safety relay module. The output signal from the relay is
input to the CNC controller and Power Supply(PS). The Power Supply outputs control signal for a
motor power magnetic contactor, which can be used to switch the power applied to the Power
Supply on and off. An emergency stop signal is usually generated by closing the B contact of a
pushbutton switch.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC controller enters the emergency
stop released state, such that the servo and spindle motors can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNC controller enters the emergency
stop state, and the servo and spindle motors stop. In case of Fig. 9.5(a) or 9.5(b), the spindle motor
power is shut off after the spindle motor is decelerated to a stop (Category 1 stop). Meanwhile, the
servo motor is forced to be a dynamic stop as a rule (Category 0 stop). By setting relevant
parameter, however, it is also possible to decelerate the servo motor to a stop, and then to shut off
the servo motor power (Category 1 stop).
Regarding how the Spindle motor or the Servo motor stops when the emergency stop button is
pushed, refer to the Item 9.3 and the Item 9.4. Regarding specifications of parameters related in
these matters, refer to the FANUC AC SERVO parameters manual(B-65270JA).
The example of the emergency stop signal circuit showed in Fig. 9.5(a) or Fig. 9.5(b) complies with
the requirements of the safety standard ISO13849-1, Performance Level(PL) c or d. However, when
calculating PL value concretely, the calculation should be based on the safety standard ISO13849-1
with the reliability data provided by each parts supplier. In case for the reliability data of CNC,
please contact FANUC sales office.
TITLE
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i- MODEL B
The modification of CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE)
Emergency
Safety input 2
stop K1
Magnetic contactor K0 Ready S2
Reset/
feedback input
CNC
Emergency stop K1
+24
*ESP
Emergency stop K1
+24(CX4) *ESP *ESP
*ESP(CX4) (CXA2A) (CXA2B)
Emergency stop K1 off delay
MCCOFF3(CX3)
MCCOFF4(CX3)
Other CNC conditions Emergency Motor brake coil Break power (-)
conditions SA stop K1
NOTE
1 When Emergency stop button S1 is pushed, Emergency stop K1 opens and Magnetic contactor K0
shuts off the power for Power Supply.
2 Set the off delay timer for shutting the power to the magnetic contactor coil in the above example as
follows:
- Set a value which allows the time required to normally stop by the spindle.
- Set a value which allows the feed axis stop time also when the feed axis quick stop function and
vertical axis fall prevention function are used.
3 Connect the auxliary contact of Magnetic contactor K0 to feedback input of Safety relay in order to
detect the failure of Magnetic contactor K0.
TITLE
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i- MODEL B
The modification of CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE)
Emergency
Safety input 2
stop K1
Magnetic contactor K0 Ready S2
Reset/
feedback input
CNC
Emergency stop K1
+24
*ESP
Emergency stop K1
+24(CX30) *ESP *ESP
*ESP(CX30) (CXA19A) (CXA19B)
Emergency stop K1 off delay
RLY1(CX29)
RLY2(CX29)
Other CNC conditions Emergency Motor brake coil Break power (-)
conditions SA stop K1
NOTE
1 When Emergency stop button S1 is pushed, Emergency stop K1 opens and Magnetic contactor K0
shuts off the power for Power Supply.
2 Set the off delay timer for shutting the power to the magnetic contactor coil in the above example as
follows:
- Set a value which allows the time required to normally stop by the spindle.
- Set a value which allows the feed axis stop time also when the feed axis quick stop function and
vertical axis fall prevention function are used.
3 Connect the auxliary contact of Magnetic contactor K0 to feedback input of Safety relay in order to
detect the failure of Magnetic contactor K0.
TITLE
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i- MODEL B
The modification of CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE)
Emergency
Stop Magnetic contactor K0 Ready S2
K1
CNC
Emergency stop K1
+24
Contact input *ESP(X8.4) Delay timer
*ESP(spindle)
Magnetic contactor
on command 0 after the Delay
spindle
stops
timer
Coil
MCC K0 AC reactor
CAUTION
1 This CNC controller can detect overtravel by using a software limit function. If the software limit
function does not operate effectively due to a failure, resulting in a possible serious accident or
loss, install a safety circuit, for example, a stroke end limit switch arranged in series with the
emergency stop button.
2 To use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by a manufacturer other than FANUC, refer to
the corresponding documentation as well as this manual. Design the emergency stop
sequence such that, if the emergency stop signal contact opens while the spindle motor is
rotating, the spindle motor is decelerated until it stops.
TITLE
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i- MODEL B
The modification of CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE)
2. Summary of change
Basic
Function
Optional
Function
Unit
Maintenance
Parts
Notice 2 Section 8.11.12 Notes of output signal specification Add At once
is added.
B-64483EN/01-04
Edit. Date Designer Description SHEET 2 / 32
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i -MODEL B
The modification of CONNECTION MANUAL(HARDWARE)
2. Summary of change
Maintenance
parts
Notice
Correction
Connect the 0V line in the basic module to the cabinet’s metal plate which is connected to
groung or signal ground bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. Refer to Item 3.4.1 about
Multipoint grounding or Single-point grounding.
Use a faston terminal for series 250 as cable terminal.
Cable(AWG10)
Connect the 0V line in the basic module to the cabinet’s metal plate which is connected to
groung or signal ground bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. Refer to Item 3.4.1 about
Multipoint grounding or Single-point grounding.
Cable(AWG10)
Connect the 0V line in the basic module to the cabinet’s metal plate which is connected to
groung or signal ground bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. Refer to Item 3.4.1 about
Multipoint grounding or Single-point grounding.
Cable(AWG10)
Connect the 0V line in the basic module to the cabinet’s metal plate which is connected to
groung or signal ground bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. Refer to Item 3.4.1 about
Multipoint grounding or Single-point grounding.
Use faston terminal for series 250 as cable terminal.
Cable(AWG10)
2.Summary of change
New, Add,
Applicable
Group Name / Outline Correct,
Date
Delete
Basic Function
Optional Function
Unit
Maintenance parts
Notice
Correction
3.List of modifications
Page Description Remark
322, 323 Correction of section 11.1.1, 11.1.2
Connector for buzzer
324, 325 Correction of section 11.2.1.1, 11.2.1.2
interface
335 Correction of section 11.3.5
※ The page shows a pertinent page of B-64483EN/01.
Series30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
The correction of connection manual
02 11.06.06 Terashima 6/6 (Hardware)
01 11.04.08 Terashima First issue. DRAW. NO.
B-64483EN/01-06 CUST
24V-IN(CPD16A)
I/O LINK(JD51A)
HDI(JA40)
MDI(CA55) See Chapters 4 to 10 for explanations about the
FSSB(COP10A-1) connection
FSSB(COP10A-2)
Ethernet
ETHERNET (CD38S)
Ethernet
ETHERNET (CD38B)
Series30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
The correction of connection manual
(Hardware)
DRAW. NO. CUST
B-64483EN/01-06
Control unit
Main board
HSSB(COP21A)
MDI unit
(CK27)
Display unit
+24VDC power supply
MDI(CA55)
HSSB(COP21M)
24V-IN(CPD18)
{
RS-232-C I/O device
Personal computer
RS232-2/USB(JD54) USB keyboard
USB printer
Ethernet
ETHERNET(CD38S)
For any connection other than the above, see Chapters 4 to 10.
Series30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
The correction of connection manual
(Hardware)
DRAW. NO. CUST
B-64483EN/01-06
CA149
COP10A-1
Rear view
COP10A-2
JD56A JA40
Fuse CA55
CPD16A
Series30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
The correction of connection manual
(Hardware)
DRAW. NO. CUST
B-64483EN/01-06
Rear view
COP21M
CA55
Series30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
The correction of connection manual
(Hardware)
DRAW. NO. CUST
B-64483EN/01-06
- Connector (CA149)
Connector used (device side) Hirose Electric DF11C-4DP-2V(57)
Hirose Electric DF11-4DS-2C (housing)
Mating connector (cable side)
Hirose Electric DF11-2428SCA (terminal)
+5V
CA149
Resistor
01
+ Buzzer
03 (connected
2
02 externally)
-
Buzzer ON
signal (internal
CNC signal)
0V
CAUTION
Never short-circuit the connector pins.
Be careful not to apply noise to the connection cable of the buzzer.
Series30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
The correction of connection manual
(Hardware)
DRAW. NO. CUST
02 11.06.06 Terashima The part of 2 is changed. B-64483EN/01-06
Spec.No./Version B-64483EN/01
2. Summary of change
Maintenance
parts
Notice
Correction
Another The module specifications of extension module C for Immediately
connection to the I/O Link i is corrected and added.
Item 8.6.2.3 I/O signal specifications Add
Item 8.6.6.1 Address map Add, Correct
Item 8.6.6.2 DO alarm detection Add, Correct
Extension module C
WARNING
1 The protection function is intended to protect the components internal to the modules
rather than external units.
2 No protection function of modules can protect their internal components in all cases.
Once any protection function has worked, remove the cause promptly. If anabsolute
maximum rating is exceeded, for example, it is likely that protection functions may not
work or an IC may break down before the related protection function works, depending
on the way or situation in which the modules are used.
3 If an output protection function is defective, it is likely that, if the load current exceeds
its rating continuously for a long time, smoke or ignition may occur.
Spec.No./Version B-64483EN/01
2. Summary of change
TITLE Correction of
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i -MODEL B
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
DRAW. NO. CUST.
01 11/08/01 Kurokawa First issue Y.Nomoto B-64483EN/01-08
SHEET
EDIT. DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 1/ 5
Item 8.8.3.1 Address map is corrected.
Xm Yn
Xm+1 Yn+1
General purpose
Xm+2 input signal Yn+2 Matrix output
Xm+3 Yn+3 signal
(key LED)
Xm+4 Yn+4
Including
Xm+5 Yn+5 general-purpose
Xm+6 Matrix input signal Yn+6 DO
Xm+7 (key switch) Yn+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG) Manual pulse
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG) generator
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 Do error detection
TITLE Correction of
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i -MODEL B
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
DRAW. NO. CUST.
B-64483EN/01-08
SHEET
EDIT. DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 2/ 5
Item 8.8.4.1 The specification of housing and contact is corrected.
TITLE Correction of
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i -MODEL B
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
DRAW. NO. CUST.
B-64483EN/01-08
SHEET
EDIT. DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 3/ 5
Item 8.8.10.1 Installation condition is corrected.
TITLE Correction of
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i -MODEL B
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
DRAW. NO. CUST.
B-64483EN/01-08
SHEET
EDIT. DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 4/ 5
Item 8.8.12 DO (Output Signal) Error Detection is corrected.
Note1) Bit of DI address (Xm+15) indicates whether the outputs of the respective DO output bits are
protected. “1” corresponds to the protected state.
Note2) Bit of DI address (Xm+15) returns to “0” when the respective alarm conditions are removed.
TITLE Correction of
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i -MODEL B
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
DRAW. NO. CUST.
B-64483EN/01-08
SHEET
EDIT. DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 5/ 5
FANUC Series 30i,31i,32i -MODEL B
The modification of CONNECTION MANUAL(HARDWARE)
2. Summary of change
Maintenance
parts
Notice
Correction
Another
8.13 I/O UNIT FOR POWER MAGNETICS CABINET Add Immediately
CNC or preceding
Following I/O Link
I/O Link slave unit slave unit
I/O unit for power
magnetics cabinet JD1A
JD1A
JD1B JD1A
(JD51A) JD1B
NOTE
The following screw type connectors cannot be used to connect the I/O Link i or manual
pulse generator.
Cable
CP1
AMP Japan
1-178288-3 (housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact) External power
Select a source that
+24V (1) meets the external
0V (2)
power terminal.
Part of the 24 VDC power input to CP1 can be taken out from CP2 by branching. CP2 should be
connected as shown below. In this case, the rating of the external 24 VDC power supplied to CP1 must
be the sum of the power consumed within the control unit and that supplied to external equipment via CP2.
The maximum capacity of power that can be obtained from a branch is 1.0 A..
CP2
1 +24V
2 0V
3
Cable
CP2
AMP JAPAN
2-178288-3 (Housing)
1-175218-5 (Contact) External device
Select a connector that
+24V (1) matches the pin layout
0V (2) of the external device.
NOTE
Do not interrupt +24V supplied to this connector during operation. Otherwise, an alarm
about communication with the CNC is issued. A voltage of +24V must not be supplied
after power-on of the CNC and +24V must not be interrupted before power-off of the
CNC. When powering off the CNC control unit, be sure to power off the I/O unit for
power magnetics cabinet.
A B A B A B A B
01 0V +24V 01 0V +24V 01 0V +24V 01 0V +24V
02 Xm+0.0 Xm+0.1 02 Xm+3.0 Xm+3.1 02 Xm+4.0 Xm+4.1 02 Xm+7.0 Xm+7.1
03 Xm+0.2 Xm+0.3 03 Xm+3.2 Xm+3.3 03 Xm+4.2 Xm+4.3 03 Xm+7.2 Xm+7.3
04 Xm+0.4 Xm+0.5 04 Xm+3.4 Xm+3.5 04 Xm+4.4 Xm+4.5 04 Xm+7.4 Xm+7.5
05 Xm+0.6 Xm+0.7 05 Xm+3.6 Xm+3.7 05 Xm+4.6 Xm+4.7 05 Xm+7.6 Xm+7.7
06 Xm+1.0 Xm+1.1 06 Xm+8.0 Xm+8.1 06 Xm+5.0 Xm+5.1 06 Xm+10.0 Xm+10.1
07 Xm+1.2 Xm+1.3 07 Xm+8.2 Xm+8.3 07 Xm+5.2 Xm+5.3 07 Xm+10.2 Xm+10.3
08 Xm+1.4 Xm+1.5 08 Xm+8.4 Xm+8.5 08 Xm+5.4 Xm+5.5 08 Xm+10.4 Xm+10.5
09 Xm+1.6 Xm+1.7 09 Xm+8.6 Xm+8.7 09 Xm+5.6 Xm+5.7 09 Xm+10.6 Xm+10.7
10 Xm+2.0 Xm+2.1 10 Xm+9.0 Xm+9.1 10 Xm+6.0 Xm+6.1 10 Xm+11.0 Xm+11.1
11 Xm+2.2 Xm+2.3 11 Xm+9.2 Xm+9.3 11 Xm+6.2 Xm+6.3 11 Xm+11.2 Xm+11.3
12 Xm+2.4 Xm+2.5 12 Xm+9.4 Xm+9.5 12 Xm+6.4 Xm+6.5 12 Xm+11.4 Xm+11.5
13 Xm+2.6 Xm+2.7 13 Xm+9.6 Xm+9.7 13 Xm+6.6 Xm+6.7 13 Xm+11.6 Xm+11.7
14 14 14 COM4 14
15 15 15 15
16 Yn+0.0 Yn+0.1 16 Yn+2.0 Yn+2.1 16 Yn+4.0 Yn+4.1 16 Yn+6.0 Yn+6.1
17 Yn+0.2 Yn+0.3 17 Yn+2.2 Yn+2.3 17 Yn+4.2 Yn+4.3 17 Yn+6.2 Yn+6.3
18 Yn+0.4 Yn+0.5 18 Yn+2.4 Yn+2.5 18 Yn+4.4 Yn+4.5 18 Yn+6.4 Yn+6.5
19 Yn+0.6 Yn+0.7 19 Yn+2.6 Yn+2.7 19 Yn+4.6 Yn+4.7 19 Yn+6.6 Yn+6.7
20 Yn+1.0 Yn+1.1 20 Yn+3.0 Yn+3.1 20 Yn+5.0 Yn+5.1 20 Yn+7.0 Yn+7.1
21 Yn+1.2 Yn+1.3 21 Yn+3.2 Yn+3.3 21 Yn+5.2 Yn+5.3 21 Yn+7.2 Yn+7.3
22 Yn+1.4 Yn+1.5 22 Yn+3.4 Yn+3.5 22 Yn+5.4 Yn+5.5 22 Yn+7.4 Yn+7.5
23 Yn+1.6 Yn+1.7 23 Yn+3.6 Yn+3.7 23 Yn+5.6 Yn+5.7 23 Yn+7.6 Yn+7.7
24 DOCOM DOCOM 24 DOCOM DOCOM 24 DOCOM DOCOM 24 DOCOM DOCOM
25 DOCOM DOCOM 25 DOCOM DOCOM 25 DOCOM DOCOM 25 DOCOM DOCOM
CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24V at CB104 (B01) , CB105(B01), CB106(B01) and CE107
(B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
Terminal No.
Address No.
Bit No. 24V
CB104(B01), CB105(B01)
CB106(B01), CB107(B01)
Xm+0.0 RV
CB104(A02)
Xm+0.1 RV
CB104(B02)
Xm+0.2 RV
CB104(A03)
Xm+0.3 RV
CB104(B03)
Xm+0.4 RV
CB104(A04)
Xm+0.5 RV
CB104(B04)
Xm+0.6 RV
CB104(A05)
Xm+0.7 RV
CB104(B05)
0V
Xm+1.0 RV
CB104(A06)
Xm+1.1 RV
CB104(B06)
Xm+1.2 RV
CB104(A07)
Xm+1.3 RV
CB104(B07)
Xm+1.4 RV
CB104(A08)
Xm+1.5 RV
CB104(B08)
Xm+1.6 RV
CB104(A09)
Xm+1.7 RV
CB104(B09)
0V
Xm+2.0 RV
CB104(A10)
Xm+2.1 RV
CB104(B10)
Xm+2.2 RV
CB104(A11)
Xm+2.3 RV
CB104(B11)
Xm+2.4 RV
CB104(A12)
Xm+2.5 RV
CB104(B12)
Xm+2.6 RV
CB104(A13)
Xm+2.7 RV
CB104(B13)
0V
Xm+3.0 RV
CB105(A02)
Xm+3.1 RV
CB105(B02)
Xm+3.2 RV
CB105(A03)
Xm+3.3 RV
CB105(B03)
Xm+3.4 RV
CB105(A04)
Xm+3.5 RV
CB105(B04)
Xm+3.6 RV
CB105(A05)
Xm+3.7 RV
CB105(B05)
0V
Xm+4.0 RV
CB106(A02)
Xm+4.1 RV
CB106(B02)
Xm+4.2 RV
CB106(A03)
Xm+4.3 RV
CB106(B03)
Xm+4.4 RV
CB106(A04)
Xm+4.5 RV
CB106(B04)
Xm+4.6 RV
CB106(A05)
Xm+4.7 RV
CB106(B05)
CB104(A01), CB105(A01)
0V CB106(A01), CB107(A01)
Xm+5.0 RV
CB106(A06)
Xm+5.1 RV
CB106(B06)
Xm+5.2 RV
CB106(A07)
Xm+5.3 RV
CB106(B07)
Xm+5.4 RV
CB106(A08)
Xm+5.5 RV
CB106(B08)
Xm+5.6 RV
CB106(A09)
Xm+5.7 RV
CB106(B09)
0V
Xm+6.0 RV
CB106(A10)
Xm+6.1 RV
CB106(B10)
Xm+6.2 RV
CB106(A11)
Xm+6.3 RV
CB106(B11)
Xm+6.4 RV
CB106(A12)
Xm+6.5 RV
CB106(B12)
Xm+6.6 RV
CB106(A13)
Xm+6.7 RV
CB106(B13)
0V
Xm+7.0 RV
CB107(A02)
Xm+7.1 RV
CB107(B02)
Xm+7.2 RV
CB107(A03)
Xm+7.3 RV
CB107(B03)
Xm+7.4 RV
CB107(A04)
Xm+7.5 RV
CB107(B04)
Xm+7.6 RV
CB107(A05)
Xm+7.7 RV
CB107(B05)
0V
Xm+8.0 RV
CB105(A06)
Xm+8.1 RV
CB105(B06)
Xm+8.2 RV
CB105(A07)
Xm+8.3 RV
CB105(B07)
Xm+8.4 RV
CB105(A08)
Xm+8.5 RV
CB105(B08)
Xm+8.6 RV
CB105(A09)
Xm+8.7 RV
CB105(B09)
0V
Xm+9.0 RV
CB105(A10)
Xm+9.1 RV
CB105(B10)
Xm+9.2 RV
CB105(A11)
Xm+9.3 RV
CB105(B11)
Xm+9.4 RV
CB105(A12)
Xm+9.5 RV
CB105(B12)
Xm+9.6 RV
CB105(A13)
Xm+9.7 RV
CB105(B13)
0V
Xm+10.0 RV
CB107(A06)
Xm+10.1 RV
CB107(B06)
Xm+10.2 RV
CB107(A07)
Xm+10.3 RV
CB107(B07)
Xm+10.4 RV
CB107(A08)
Xm+10.5 RV
CB107(B08)
Xm+10.6 RV
CB107(A09)
Xm+10.7 RV
CB107(B09)
0V
Xm+11.0 RV
CB107(A10)
Xm+11.1 RV
CB107(B10)
Xm+11.2 RV
CB107(A11)
Xm+11.3 RV
CB107(B11)
Xm+11.4 RV
CB107(A12)
Xm+11.5 RV
CB107(B12)
Xm+11.6 RV
CB107(A13)
Xm+11.7 RV
CB107(B13)
0V
For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed, the
input is “0”. For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which a common voltage can
be selected (from Xm+4.0 to Xm+4.7), the input is “0” when the COM4 (CB106-A14) pin is
connected to the 0 V power supply or “1” when it is connected to the +24V power supply.
Connect COM4 when used. When addresses from Xm+4.0 to Xm+4.7 are not used,
connect COM4 to the 0V power supply.
CAUTION
An output DC voltage of +24V at CB104 (B01), CB105(B01), CB106(B01) and CE107
(B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from the outside.
Terminal No.
DOCOM CB104(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB105(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB106(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB107(A24,B24,A25,B25)
+24V 0V
Address No.
+24V stabilized
Bit No. power supply
トの上
Yn+0.0 CB104(A16)
Relay
DV
Yn+0.1 DV
CB104(B16)
Yn+0.2 DV
CB104(A17)
Yn+0.3 DV
CB104(B17)
Yn+0.4 DV
CB104(A18)
Yn+0.5 DV
CB104(B18)
Yn+0.6 DV
CB104(A19)
Yn+0.7 DV
CB104(B19)
Yn+1.0 DV
CB104(A20)
Yn+1.1 DV
CB104(B20)
Yn+1.2 DV
CB104(A21)
Yn+1.3 DV
CB104(B21)
Yn+1.4 DV
CB104(A22)
Yn+1.5 DV
CB104(B22)
Yn+1.6 DV
CB104(A23)
Yn+1.7 DV
CB104(B23)
CB104(A01)
0V CB105(A01)
CB106(A01)
CB107(A01)
DOCOM CB104(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB105(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB106(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB107(A24,B24,A25,B25)
+24V 0V
Address No.
+24V stabilized
Bit No. power supply
トの上
Yn+2.0 CB105(A16)
Relay
DV
Yn+2.1 DV
CB105(B16)
Yn+2.2 DV
CB105(A17)
Yn+2.3 DV
CB105(B17)
Yn+2.4 DV
CB105(A18)
Yn+2.5 DV
CB105(B18)
Yn+2.6 DV
CB105(A19)
Yn+2.7 DV
CB105(B19)
Yn+3.0 DV
CB105(A20)
Yn+3.1 DV
CB105(B20)
Yn+3.2 DV
CB105(A21)
Yn+3.3 DV
CB105(B21)
Yn+3.4 DV
CB105(A22)
Yn+3.5 DV
CB105(B22)
Yn+3.6 DV
CB105(A23)
Yn+3.7 DV
CB105(B23)
CB104(A01)
0V CB105(A01)
CB106(A01)
CB107(A01)
DOCOM CB104(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB105(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB106(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB107(A24,B24,A25,B25)
+24V 0V
Address No.
+24V stabilized
Bit No. power supply
Yn+4.0 CB106(A16)
Relay
DV
Yn+4.1 DV
CB106(B16)
Yn+4.2 DV
CB106(A17)
Yn+4.3 DV
CB106(B17)
Yn+4.4 DV
CB106(A18)
Yn+4.5 DV
CB106(B18)
Yn+4.6 DV
CB106(A19)
Yn+4.7 DV
CB106(B19)
Yn+5.0 DV
CB106(A20)
Yn+5.1 DV
CB106(B20)
Yn+5.2 DV
CB106(A21)
Yn+5.3 DV
CB106(B21)
Yn+5.4 DV
CB106(A22)
Yn+5.5 DV
CB106(B22)
Yn+5.6 DV
CB106(A23)
Yn+5.7 DV
CB106(B23)
CB104(A01)
0V CB105(A01)
CB106(A01)
CB107(A01)
DOCOM CB104(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB105(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB106(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CB107(A24,B24,A25,B25)
+24V 0V
Address No.
+24V stabilized
Bit No. power supply
Yn+6.0 CB107(A16)
Relay
DV
Yn+6.1 DV
CB107(B16)
Yn+6.2 DV
CB107(A17)
Yn+6.3 DV
CB107(B17)
Yn+6.4 DV
CB107(A18)
Yn+6.5 DV
CB107(B18)
Yn+6.6 DV
CB107(A19)
Yn+6.7 DV
CB107(B19)
Yn+7.0 DV
CB107(A20)
Yn+7.1 DV
CB107(B20)
Yn+7.2 DV
CB107(A21)
Yn+7.3 DV
CB107(B21)
Yn+7.4 DV
CB107(A22)
Yn+7.5 DV
CB107(B22)
Yn+7.6 DV
CB107(A23)
Yn+7.7 DV
CB107(B23)
CB104(A01)
0V CB105(A01)
CB106(A01)
CB107(A01)
Connect the 0V line of this unit to the cabinet’s metal plate which is connected to ground or signal ground
bar nearby via the protective ground terminal. Ground cable can be connected to the terminal from the
bottlom of the unit case. Refer to Item 3.4.1.1 about Multipoint grounding or Single-point grounding.
Use a faston terminal for series 250 as cable terminal.
Ordering specifications
Item Ordering specifications Remarks
I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet A02B-0319-C001
Fuse (spare parts) A03B-0815-K001 1A
Module specifications
Item Specification Remarks
DI points 96 points 24 V input
DO points 64 points 24 V source type output
MPG interface Up to 3 units
NOTE
To connect an optical adapter for the I/O Link i to both connectors JD1A and JD1B, the
above power supply rating + 70mA is required.
If you use the power supply which is output from CP2, add the amount to the above
current rating .
NOTE
Be sure to connect all DO power supply pins DOCOM.
Address allocation
For connection to the I/O Link i
For the I/O unit for power magnetics cabinet, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
For connection to the I/O Link, addresses are allocated to general-purpose input signals, manual pulse
generators, and DO alarm detection at a time. For this reason, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Do not use the DI space of manual pulse generator with the ladder because the CNC processes the
manual pulse generator signals directly.
Information output to the system relay area and corresponding location where an error occurred
Slot number Alarm information number Address of the DO driver which detects an error
1 0 Yn1
1 1 Yn1+1
1 2 Yn1+2
1 3 Yn1+3
1 4 Yn1+4
1 5 Yn1+5
1 6 Yn1+6
1 7 Yn1+7
2. Summary of change
Basic
Function
Optional
Function
Unit
Maintenance
Parts
Correction
Another
1. Outline
For UL recognition of the product, FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B shall be installed
after due considerations on UL requirements.
• Use CNC, Display and MDI unit in Pollution degree 2 *2 environment or cleaner
environment, except for part exposed on the outside of enclosure.
(*2. Pollution degree is a classification according to the amount of pollution and
condensation present in the environment.
"Pollution Degree 2" is defined in the standard UL 508 as follows.
Normally, only nonconductive pollution occurs; however, temporary conductivity caused
by condensation may be expected.)
• Power supply unit for this unit must have an isolating device and the DC 24 Volt
output must be isolated from AC mains supply.
(This isolation can be achieved with the use of the isolating DC power supply unit that
complies with UL standard.)
DC 24 Volt power cable needs to be used with 14AWG or 16AWG size conductors.